SECTION I - CLASS DEFINITION
GENERAL STATEMENT OF THE CLASS SUBJECT MATTER
A. This is the generic class for optical elements
and optical systems not elsewhere classified.
Among the optical elements included in this class are:
Lenses; Polarizers; Diffraction gratings; Prisms; Reflectors; Filters; Projection
screens; Optical Modulators; Optical Demodulators.
B. Among the optical systems included in this class
are:
Compound lens systems; Light reflecting signalling
systems (e.g., retroreflectors); Stereoscopic
systems; Binocular devices; Systems of lenticular
elements; Systems involving light interference; Glare
reducing systems; Light dividing and combining systems; Light
control systems (e.g., light
valves); Building illumination with natural light; Systems
for protecting or shielding elements; Optical systems whose
operation depends upon polarizing, diffracting, dispersing, reflecting, or
refracting light; Kaleidoscopes
C. Further included are certain apertures, closures, and viewing
devices of a specialized nature which involve no intentional reflection, refraction, or
filtering of light rays.
D. This class also includes optical elements combined with
another type of structure(s) to constitute an
optical element combined with a nonoptical structure or a perfection
or improvement in the optical element. This includes filters
with supports or frames; reflectors with handles, vehicles, or
controlling motors; and prisms with mountings.
Also, included are lenses with supports or mountings, lenses
with diverse art tools, instruments or machines, lenses
with casings and lenses with viewed object supports or viewed object
or field illumination. Additionally, included
are stereo-viewers with view changers, illumination
or supporting, mounting, enclosing or light shielding
structure; lenses with spacing structure such as barrels
with or without an additional support, handle or illumination; and
optical elements with moisture or foreign particle control.
E. Included here also are certain accessories or
attachments combined with optical elements such as blinds, shields, shades, and
caps or covers for preventing the accumulation of dust, moisture, or
other foreign material.
SECTION II - LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS
SUPPORTS OR MOUNTS FOR OPTICAL ELEMENTS AND SYSTEMS
Included here (359) also are supports, mounts, and frames
which are particularly adapted for use with optical elements.
The nominal recitation of a mirror or filter in combination with
such structure is generally not sufficient for classification here, if
the mirror or filter is treated as a panel or lamina of general
utility. Such panels with associated components, such
as frames, edging, backing, etc., mechanically
and permanently assembled thereto are provided for elsewhere.
Supports for such panel type structures are classified elsewhere. (See
References to the Current Class, below.)
However, combinations of a detailed mirror with its support
are classified in this class. In the case of other optical
elements, such as prisms or lenses, the broad
recitation of the element in combination with the support or mounting
is sufficient for classification in this class. This Class (359) provides
for lenses, prisms, and filters respectively with
supports. (See Subclass References to the Current
Class, below.)
Stereo-viewer supports and mountings are provided
for in this class. (See Subclass References to
the Current Class, below.)
NONVISIBLE RADIATION
Included in this class are not only those elements which operate
in the visible portion of the spectrum, but also those
which operate in the near visible portion of the spectrum (i.e., infrared
and ultraviolet) in accordance with optical principles.
Systems which function in both the visible and near visible portions
of the spectrum are classified here unless a specific structure
is claimed as a result of the utilization of invisible ray energy.
Systems whose operation is restricted to the nonvisible portion
of the spectrum are classified elsewhere. (See
References to Other Classes, below.)
OPTICAL SYSTEM INCLUDING PHOTOCELL
Generally, where a photocell is claimed as a part
of the optical system, the subject matter is excluded from
this class. Such subject matter is typically provided
for with the art for radiant energy or measuring and testing. However, where
a modulating signal is recovered from a modulated light wave (as
in an optical communication receiver or in an optical demodulator), classification
is in Class 359. (See References to Other Classes, below.)
OPTICAL WAVEGUIDES
Optical waveguiding elements, per se, are
classified in elsewhere. Also, combinations of
an optical waveguide with an associated mechanical connecting device
or a device coupling light into or out of the optical waveguide
are classified elsewhere. (See References to Other
Classes, below.)
OPTICAL MODULATION
An optical modulator, in general, is classified
in this class (359). However, optical
modulation occuring solely within the confines of an optical waveguide
is excluded from this class. Such subject matter is provided
for in Class 385.
OPTICAL AMPLIFICATION OR FREQUENCY CONVERSION
A detailed optical amplifier/frequency converter, per
se, or such subject matter in combination with an additional waveguide
structure is classified in this class (359). However, the
nominal recitation of any type of optical amplifier/frequency
converter together with an additional waveguide structure is classified
elsewhere where such combination meets the class requirements.
MEASURING AND TESTING
A claimed image forming optical system plus a reticle is classified
in this class. Sighting instruments for determining geometrical
relationships where no significant optical system is claimed are
classified elsewhere. Measuring and testing systems which
determine the optical characteristics of light so as to measure
materials and provides for lens or reflective image former testing
are classified elsewhere. Eye examining and testing instruments
are classified elsewhere. (See References to Other
Classes, below.)
LASERS
Lasers and similar devices, per se, are
excluded from this class. See References to Other Classes
for lasers and similar devices when they function as a generator
of coherent electromagnetic waves in the optical range.
OPTICAL TELEMETRY
Optical telemetry includes the combination of an optical data
link between multiple locations together with a specific sensor
used in a particular environment. Since the overall combination
specifies an environment or specific sensor, the environment
or sensor will control the classification. The following
are examples of proper art areas for optical telemetry:
(1) Wellbore telemetry including any type
of radiant energy; (i.e., optical, radio, etc.). (See
References to Other Classes, below.)
(2) An optical data link in combination
with a specific sensor, unless there is a place for the
specific sensor in another class. (See References
to Other Classes, below.)
COMPOSITIONS AND STOCK MATERIAL
Where there is no shape or structure peculiar to optical elements
as in compositions or stock material, the subject matter
is excluded from this class. See References to Other Classes, below, for
classes that provide for these compositions and stock material.
OPTICAL ELEMENTS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE
For Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere, see References
to Other Classes, below.
OPTICAL ELEMENTS COMBINED WITH DIVERSE TYPE ART DEVICES
An optical element combined with a diverse type art device
where the element results in an improvement or perfection of the
device is generally classified with the device. See Subclass
References to the Current Class, below, for a
reference to details of this distinction with reference to lenses, and
also for references to combinations of a reflector and diverse type
art device. The combination of an optical element and
an electric discharge device is provided for elsewhere. See
Class Definition, section D, above. (See
References to Other Classes, below.)
For Classes that are more common external classifications
of systems including or combined with optical elements, see
References to Other Classes, below.
METHODS OF MAKING OPTICAL ELEMENTS CLASSIFIED ELSEWHERE
For Methods of Making Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere, see
References to Other Classes, below.
SECTION III - SUBCLASS REFERENCES TO THE CURRENT CLASS
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 477, | for stereo-viewer supports and mountings. |
| 871+, | for combinations of a detailed mirror with its support. |
| 811+, | 831, and 892 provide for lenses, prisms, and filters
respectively with supports. |
| 809, | see (1) Note for details of the
following distinction with reference to lenses: an optical
element combined with a diverse type art device where the element
results in an improvement or perfection of the device is generally
classified with the device. |
| 838, | under "SEARCH CLASS" for numerous
combinations of a reflector and diverse type art device. |
SECTION IV - REFERENCES TO OTHER CLASSES
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 33, | Geometrical Instruments,
subclasses 227+ for sighting devices for determining geometrical relationships. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 33, | Geometrical Instruments, for sighting instruments for determining geometrical
relationships where no significant optical system is claimed. (Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class "Measuring and
Testing") |
| 52, | Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), provides for such panels with associated components, such as
frames, edging, backing, etc., mechanically and
permanently assembled thereto. (See Lines With
Other Classes and Within This Class, "Supports
or Mounts for Optical Elements and Systems" above.) |
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclasses 385+ for processes for forming optical fibers, waveguides, or
preforms; subclass 31 for chemical glass etching; subclasses
37+ for glass lens making. (See Lines
With Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 117, | Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and
Epitaxy Growth Processes; Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor, for processes and non-coating apparatus
for growing therein-defined single-crystal of
all types of materials, including inorganic or organic. (See
Lines With Other Classes "Methods of Making Optical Elements
Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 156, | Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
subclasses 99+ for optically transparent glass sandwich making. (See
Lines With Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 205, | Electrolysis: Processes, Compositions
Used Therein, and Methods of Preparing the Compositions,
subclass 71 for the electroforming of a mirror or reflector
and subclass 116 for producing a mirror or reflector by electrolytic
coating. (See Lines With Other Classes, "Methods
of Making Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 248, | Supports,
subclasses 466+ provides for supports for panel type structures. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Supports
or Mounts for Optical Elements and Systems," above.) |
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 200+ for optical systems for controlling or controlled
by a photocell and subclasses 336.1 to 395 for methods and
apparatus for the detection of invisible, radiation or
the testing of material by invisible radiation for the production, transmission, control
or general utilization of invisible radiant energy, including
cathode rays, ultra-violet rays and the radiations
and emanations of radio-active substances and the irradiation
of material not limited to particular arts. (See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 250, | Radiant Energy, for systems whose operation is restricted to the
nonvisible portion of the spectrum. (See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class "Nonvisible Radiation.") |
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 200+ generally, where a photocell is claimed
as a part of the optical system. (See Lines With
Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
System Including Photocell.") |
| 252, | Compositions, for compositions generally,
subclasses 299.01+ providing for compositions of liquid crystals and
subclasses 582+ providing for other light transmission
modifying compositions. (See Lines With Other
Classes and Within This Class, "Compositions and Stock
Material.") |
| 264, | Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes,
subclasses 1.1+ for optical article shaping or treating. (See
Lines With Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical Elements
Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 313, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
subclasses 110+ for an electron lamp or discharge device having
an optical device structurally combined therewith. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 340, | Communications: Electrical,
subclass 815.76 for lens type indicator. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 340, | Communications: Electrical,
subclasses 853.1+ for wellbore telemetry including any type of radiant
energy; (i.e., optical, radio, etc.). (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Telemetry," above.) |
| 340, | Communications: Electrical,
subclasses 870.28+ for an optical data link in combination with a
specific sensor. (See Lines With Other Classes
and Within This Class, "Optical Telemetry," above.) |
| 343, | Communications: Radio Wave Antennas,
subclasses 909+ for radio wave refracting means and filters. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 195+ , 335+, 744+, and 832+ for
optical systems included in television systems. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 159.01+ for spectacle lenses. (See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting, for spectacles and instruments for vision testing
and eye examining. (See Lines With Other Classes
and Within This Class "Optical Elements Combined With Diverse Type
Art Devices.") |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 200+ for eye examining and testing instruments. (Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Measuring
and Testing") |
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures, for optical systems used in motion picture apparatus. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors, for image projectors. (See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class "Optical Elements
Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 396 for measurements involving moire patterns caused
by plural optical grids relatively movable with respect to each
other and subclass 242.1 for moire pattern examination
of mesh or grid like material including knitted fabrics to determine
the number of threads, lines or the spacing between the
lines. (See Lines With Other Classes and Within
This Class, "Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing, for methods and apparatus for analyzing light, determining the
optical or nonoptical properties of materials, measuring
optically dimensions, determining optically spatial relations
and inspecting optically for flaws and imperfections, within the
scope of this class and not otherwise classifiable. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Device.") |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing, provides generally for measuring and testing systems which determine
the optical characteristics of light so as to measure materials
and provides in
subclasses 124+ for lens or reflective image former testing. (Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Measuring
and Testing") |
| 358, | Facsimile and Static Presentation Processing,
subclasses 400 through 304for optical systems included in facsimile systems. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 341+ and 326+ respectively for reflecting and
refracting elements to be used with an artificial source of illumination. |
| 362, | Illumination, appropriate subclasses for light sources combined with
optical light modifiers, especially
subclass 19 for light sources with polarizers; subclasses
166-170 and 293 for light sources with selected wavelength
filters; subclass 268 for light sources combined with plural
serial lens elements; subclasses 296.01-296.1
for light sources with reflectors; and subclasses 326-350
for refractors and reflectors, respectively, for
use with light sources. (See this class (359), Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, Optical Elements
Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.) |
| 365, | Static Information Storage and Retrieval,
subclasses 64 , 106+, 120+, 215+, and
234+ for systems and circuits utilizing radiant energy. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for oscillators of the quantum
electronic type for generating coherent electromagnetic waves in
the optical range by stimulated emission of radiation (e.g., lasers, irasers). (See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class "Optical Elements
Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for lasers and similar devices, per
se, when they function as a generator of coherent electromagnetic
waves in the optical range. (See Lines With Other
Classes and Within This Class "Lasers," above.) |
| 378, | X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices,
subclasses 145+ for X-ray beam control devices. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for light wave transmitting
devices. (See Lines With Other Classes and Within
This Class "Optical Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 396, | Photography, appropriate subclasses for still cameras. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 399, | Electrophotography,
subclasses 9+ for diagnostics, subclasses 38+ for
controls, subclasses 130+ for image formation, subclasses
168+ for charging, subclasses 177+ for
exposure, subclasses 222+ for development, subclasses
297+ for transfer, subclasses 320+ for
fixing, subclasses 343+ for cleaning, and
subclasses 361+ for document handling. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 424, | Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body
Treating Compositions,
subclasses 59+ for a sun or radiation screening or sun tanning
composition intended for topical application to a living body. (See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Compositions
and Stock Material.") |
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se, wherein
the product is an optical element. (See Lines
With Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
subclass 1.1 for miscellaneous liquid crystal articles and appropriate
subclasses for a metallic or nonmetallic stock material product
in the form of a single or plural layer web or sheet or a structurally
defined or coated rod, strand, fiber flake or
other element and a nonstructural metallic or nonmetallic composite
web or sheet defined by the compositions of the layers. Note
subclass 910 (a cross-reference art collection) for
a product with molecular orientation. (See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Compositions
and Stock Material.") |
| 451, | Abrading,
subclasses 42+ for a lens grinding process and subclasses 323
and 325 for a machine for grinding an optical lens. (See Lines
With Other Classes, "Methods of Making Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 505, | Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material, Process,
subclasses 100+ for high temperature (Tc
30 K) superconducting material. (See
Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Compositions
and Stock Materia.") |
| 505, | Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material, Process,
subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc
30 K) superconducting device, and particularly
subclasses 181+ for photoconductive, light transmissive, light emissive, or
light responsive device or component. (See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Classified Elsewhere.") |
| 505, | Superconductor Technology: Apparatus, Material, Process,
subclasses 150+ for high temperature (Tc
30 K) superconducting device; and particularly
subclasses 181+ for photoconductive, light transmissive, light emissive, or
light responsive device or component. (See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, "Optical
Elements Combined With Diverse Type Art Devices.") |
| 702, | Data Processing: Measuring, Calibrating, or Testing,
subclass 40 , 49, 134+, and
172 for the use of radiant energy (e.g., X-ray, light, etc.) in a
mechanical measurement system, flow metering, temperature
measuring system, or system for measuring thickness or
width, respectively, and subclass 159 for measuring
of linear distance or length by reflected signal (e.g., ultrasonic, light, laser). |
| 708, | Electrical Computers: Arithmetic Processing and
Calculating,
subclass 816 for optical correlation or convolution and subclass
831 for electro-optical analog integrators. This
class will accept optical computers where the resultant mathematical
operation is in the form of an electrical signal. For
mathematical operations performed by optical means, classification
is in Class 359. |
SECTION V - GLOSSARY
BINOCULAR
Pertaining to the use of both eyes in the act of viewing.
BIREFRINGENT
Certain crystalline materials have their outer electrons bound
more strongly in one direction than another resulting in the material
having two refractive indices depending on the direction of the
oscillation. Such materials are termed birefringent and, if
an unpolarized light ray enters such a material obliquely, it
will be refracted into two different linearly polarized rays having
directions of polarization which are normal to one another.
DICHROIC
As used in one sense, the term dichroic refers
to (1) the property of some materials to absorb
to a greater degree one or the other of the two orthogonal component
vectors which can be considered as constituting ordinary light.
This results in producing light polarized to a degree depending
upon the relative absorption of the two components. The
term dichroic is also used to refer to (2) an
optical element which will transmit light of one color and reflect
other colors with little light being absorbed. These elements
are usually composed of superimposed strata of dielectric materials.
DIFFRACTION
A phenomenon resulting from the wave nature of light, e.g., light
passing through a slit of decreasing width, forms a narrower
and narrower beam until the slit width approaches the wavelength
of light, after which further decreasing of the slit width
results in a beam having a larger and larger divergence.
DIFFRACTION PATTERN
The intensity profile of a light beam after having passed by
a diffracting aperture or object.
DIFFUSE
Pertaining to the scattering or random deviation of transmitted
or reflected light.
HOLOGRAPHY
The optical recording of an object wave formed by the resulting
interference pattern of two (or more) mutually coherent, component
light beams. Generally, a coherent beam is first
split into two component beams, one of which irradiates
an object, the second of which irradiates a recording medium.
The diffraction or scattering of the first wave by the object forms
an object wave which proceeds to and interferes with a second coherent beam (i.e., reference
beam) at the medium. The resulting pattern is
a two-dimensional (thin) or three-dimensional (thick) hologram
of the object wave, depending on the thickness of the recording
medium.
IMAGE FORMER
An optical device capable of producing an image from light
rays proceeding from an object.
INTERFERENCE
The interaction of two light waves which, as
a result of their relative phases, produce a cancellation
or reinforcement of wave energy.
LIGHT, VISIBLE LIGHT
Visible light is radiation which stimulates the optical receptors
of the eye and has a wavelength from 3850 to 7600 Angstrom units.
The term light is used to refer to wavelengths in the above mentioned
range and, often, also to refer to the ranges
immediately adjacent, i.e., the ultra
violet and infrared ranges which are nonvisible.
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
The conveyance of information from one location to another
via at least one optical transmitter and one optical receiver.
These are used to transfer the information with an optical beam
and this beam can be used in various communication schemes to enable
the most effective or desired method of moving the information, including
optical multiplexing when plural information signals or plural transmitters
and receivers are utilized.
OPTICAL ELEMENT
A structure which performs a basic optical function, i.e., the
structure, when exposed to or placed in the path of a light
beam, will cause refraction, diffraction, attenuation, or
blocking of the light or a modification in the character or properties
of the light. In lenses, the complete lens is
considered an optical element, while the individual masses
of a plural element lens are considered as lens elements or lens
components.
OPTICAL MODULATION
The change of some characteristic of an optical beam
in direct relation to a varying signal applied thereto.
The change may be temporal (e.g., amplitude, frequency, or phase) or
directional.
OPTICAL SYSTEM
A combination of two or more similar or diverse optical elements
which are optically related.
OPTICS, OPTICAL
The science of light and vision and the construction
of optical instruments.
POLARIZATION
In a beam of polarized electromagnetic radiation, the polarization
direction is the direction of the electric field vector (with
no distinction between positive and negative as the field oscillates
back and forth). The electric field vector is
always in the plane which is normal to the beam propagation direction. At
a given stationary point in space, the electric field vector
of a beam can vary with time at random (unpolarized beam), can
remain constant (plane-polarized beam), or
can rotate. In the latter two cases, the beam
is said to be "polarized" and can be thought of
as the resultant vector of two orthogonal component vectors having
equal amplitudes. If the phase difference of the two component
vectors is 0 degrees, the light is plane polarized; if
90 degrees, the light is circularly polarized; and
if it is between 0 and 90 degrees, the light is elliptically
polarized. Elliptical and plane polarized light can be
converted into each other by means of birefringent optical systems
which retard one of the orthogonal component vectors relative to
the other.
REFLECTION
Light striking a surface and returning back into the medium
from which it came, at an angle equal but opposite to the
angle of incidence.
REFRACTION
The deviation of light which results when a ray of light passes
obliquely from a medium of one refractive index to a medium of another
refractive index.
RETROREFLECTION
Light striking a surface and returning back into the medium
in the reverse direction (i.e., a
180 degree change from its original path).
SPECTRUM
The band of colors produced by separating a beam of white
light into its component frequencies.
TERMINAL IMAGE
The last image formed by a compound system.
ULTRAVIOLET/INFRARED
Electromagnetic radiation immediately above and below the
optical visible frequency spectrum is termed ultraviolet and infrared, respectively. This
entire range of frequencies is encompassed by the term "light."
SUBCLASSES
![[List of Patents for class 359 subclass 1]](../ps.gif) 1 | HOLOGRAPHIC SYSTEM OR ELEMENT: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein apparatus for forming a record of
the phase and amplitude information of a wavefront where the information
can be used to reconstruct the original wavefront; apparatus
to reconstruct the original wavefront from a record containing the
phase and amplitude information of this wavefront; or the
record itself is recited.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass is the generic locus for subject
matter relating to holography. However, where
particular use or application is claimed, classification
is in the appropriate use or application class. |
| | (2)
Note. Nominally claimed subject matter external
to this class in combination with holography is classified here.
Significantly claimed subject matter external to this class in combination
with holography is classified in the class appropriate to the external
subject matter. |
| | (3)
Note. Interferometers are excluded from this subclass
and are classified in Class 356, subclasses 345+. |
| | (4)
Note. Holographic memories including those having
a nominal recitation of a photodetector or photocell are included in
this or the indented subclasses. Static holographic storage
and retrieval systems having electrical circuitry are classified
in Class 365. |
| | (5)
Note. Dynamic holographic storage and retrieval
systems having electrical circuitry are classified in Class 369. |
| | (6)
Note. Mere nominal recitation of developing, fixing, bleaching, or
etching a photographic recording medium does not exclude the subject
matter from this class. Holographic systems including significant
chemical processing steps are classified in Class 430, Radiation
Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof. |
| | (7)
Note. Systems for making holographic matched filters
are included in this and the indented subclasses. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 558+, | for correlation systems using holographic matched
filters. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 73, | Measuring and Testing,
subclasses 603+ and 656 for acoustic holographic testing and for
holographic interferometry in which an object is acted upon during
the test, as for example, stressed or vibrated. |
| 235, | Registers,
subclass 457 for holographic coded record sensors with particular
circuitry to process electrical signals. |
| 250, | Radiant Energy, appropriate subclasses, for holographic systems
that use radiation entirely outside of the optical or microwave
ranges and which is not acoustic, and
subclass 550 for photocell circuits and apparatus for interference
pattern analysis (e.g., holography). |
| 283, | Printed Matter, appropriate subclasses for holograms in combination with
credit or identification cards. |
| 340, | Communications: Electrical,
subclass 980 for nonalarm flight indicator visible in pilot’s
line-of-sight through windscreen. |
| 342, | Communications: Directive Radio Wave
Systems and Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio
Navigation),
subclasses 176+ for head up display combined with radar. |
| 345, | Computer Graphics Processing and Selective Visual
Display Systems,
subclasses 7+ for heads-up displays with selective electrical
control. |
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 40+ for television systems which use holography. |
| 355, | Photocopying,
subclass 2 for photographic copying of holograms by nonholographic
means. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 457 for holographic interferometry in general. |
| 365, | Static Information Storage and Retrieval,
subclass 125 , 216, and 235 for holographic
storage and retrieval of information systems including significant
and particular electrical circuitry. |
| 367, | Communications, Electrical:
Acoustic Wave Systems and Devices,
subclasses 8+ for acoustic holography in general. |
| 369, | Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval,
subclass 103 for dynamic storage or retrieval using a holographic
storage medium. |
| 378, | X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices,
subclass 36 for X-ray holography or interferometry. |
| 380, | Cryptography,
subclass 54 for this subject matter used in a device for revealing
concealed information. |
| 382, | Image Analysis,
subclasses 210+ for spatial filtering (e.g., holography) in
a pattern recognition system. |
| 396, | Photography, for photography in general. |
| 430, | Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof,
subclasses 1+ for holographic systems involving significant chemical
processing steps, composition, or product. |
| 600, | Surgery,
subclasses 101+ for endoscopes. |
| 708, | Electrical Computers: Arithmetic Processing
and Calculating, appropriate subclasses for electrical computers
or data processing arithmetic systems which may use holography. |
|
| | |
| 2 | Authentication: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter wherein a hologram is used to provide proof
that a document is not counterfeit or to make a document copy-proof.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 283, | Printed Matter, for document authentification with nominally recited
holograms. |
| 380, | Cryptography,
subclass 54 for modifying an optical image in order to conceal
or reveal a hidden message. |
|
| | |
| 3 | Having particular recording medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter in which details of the internal structure
of a holographic recording medium is defined either physically or
chemically.
| | (1)
Note. An example of such a physical definition: "a
multilayer emulsion, each layer being sensitive to a different color".
A chemical definition: "thermoplastic tape". |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 430, | Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof,
subclass 1 for holographic processes involving significant
chemical processing steps composition or product; and appropriate
subclasses for radiation chemical recording media, per
se. |
|
| | |
| 4 | Recyclable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 3. Subject matter in which the recording medium is of such
a nature that the recorded information can be erased to permit further
record-erase cycles.
| | (1)
Note. Included here are photochromics, thermochromics, dye
cells, magnetic films, etc. | |
| | |
| 5 | Magnetic material: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter wherein the recording medium is a material
which is alterable by application of magnetic force. |
| | |
| 6 | Sandwich having photoconductor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter in which the recording medium is integral
with a layer of material which, when illuminated, undergoes
a decrease in resistance.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 257, | Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State
Diodes),
subclasses 10 , 11, 21, 53-56, 72, 113-118, 184-189, 225-234, 257, 258, 290-294, 414, 431-466, and
910 for light responsive active semiconductor devices. |
|
| | |
| 7 | Cyrstalline material: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 4. Subject matter in which the recording material is either
a single crystal or in polycrystalline form. |
| | |
| 9 | For synthetically generating a hologram: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter including means for providing a hologram
of a single object by other than a single exposure to the interference
pattern of light from the object as a whole and a reference beam.
| | (1)
Note. Holographic stereograms are considered recordings
of different images and are excluded from this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. Holographic memories are excluded in which
an object beam is scanned so as to act as a page composer when each
bit is intended to be separately detected. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 23, | for holographic stereograms. |
|
| | |
| 10 | Using modulated or plural reference beams: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter in which a hologram is formed by interfering
an object-modulated beam with another beam which is spatially
or temporally modulated or with a plurality of other beams.
| | (1)
Note. Phase modulation systems to compensate for
object motion and systems for extending the depth of fluid are included
here. | |
| | |
| 11 | Spatial, phase or amplitude modulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 10. Subject matter in which the reference beam is modulated
by changing its phase, path length, or amplitude
so as to have a nonuniform wavefront.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 22+, | for spatial multiplexed holograms. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 365, | Static Information Storage and Retrieval,
subclass 49.1 for associative holographic memories. |
|
| | |
| 12 | Copying by holographic means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter in which an image reconstructed from one
hologram is used as the object in making a second hologram.
| | (1)
Note. Systems in which a holographic analog to an
ordinary optical element is used to shape or form a beam used to make
a second hologram, but which does not by itself provide
the object information for the second hologram are excluded.
Such systems are classified based on the other claimed features
in subclass 1 and its indented subclasses. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 355, | Photocopying, appropriate subclasses for photographic copying, in
general. |
| 399, | Electrophotography,
subclass 118 for optics with particular modular or displaceable
structure, subclass 137 optical intermediate storage of
original image, subclasses 196+ for variable magnification
during exposure, subclass 216 for slit exposure by pivoting mirror, subclass
218 for lens used in exposure, and subclass 219 for fiber optics
used in exposure. |
|
| | |
| 13 | Head up display: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter wherein a first image is optically superimposed
upon a second image within a field of view.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 345, | Computer Graphics Processing and Selective Visual
Display Systems,
subclasses 7+ for heads-up displays with selective electrical
control. |
|
| | |
| 15 | Using a hologram as an optical element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter wherein a holographic equivalent to an ordinary
optical element is formed or used and wherein the holographic equivalent does
not itself contain any intelligence or image information more significant
than a point image.
| | (1)
Note. The optical elements for which the hologram
may be substituted include lenses, reflectors, diffusers, gratings, polarizers, beam
splitters or combiners, filters, and phase plates
or beam couplers. | |
| | |
| 16 | With aberration correction: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 15. Subject matter which compensates for the inability of an
optical system to provide a point to point correspondence between
an object and its image. |
| | |
| 17 | Scanner: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 15. Subject matter in which a hologram is used to direct a beam
of light successively over the elements of a given region.
| | (1)
Note. Systems using a holographic element to convert
one scan pattern to another are included here. | |
| | |
| 18 | Flat rotating disk: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 17. Subject matter where the scanning element is a planar surface, containing
holographic segments, which is rotated about an axis normal
to the surface. |
| | |
| 19 | Lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 15. Subject matter in which the holographic equivalent is an
optical device which focuses light.
| | (1)
Note. Holograms which are used to form a single
image of an extended two- or three-dimensional
object are included here. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 362+, | for compound lens systems. |
| 642+, | for lenses. |
|
| | |
| 20 | Multiple point hologram (e.g., fly-eye
lens, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 19. Subject matter wherein a hologram, which simulates
one produced by the interference of two beams with one of the beams
consisting of a plurality of separate subbeams, is produced which
is the analog of a plurality of lenses in a plane such as lenticular
or fly eye lens array. |
| | |
| 21 | Having defined page composer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter including the details of the internal structure
of a changeable modulator, which serves as the principle
object in a system for making a plurality of holograms, where
the internal conditions of the modulator represent the intelligence
to be recorded in the holograms.
| | (1)
Note. Systems in which a page composer is merely
nominally recited are excluded from this subclass and are classified
on the basis of the other claimed features in subclass 1 and its
indented subclasses. | |
| | |
| 22 | For producing or reconstructing images from multiple holograms (e.g., color, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter comprising systems specifically adapted for
making a plurality of holograms, simultaneously or sequentially, of
different intelligence or for reading out images from a plurality
of holograms.
| | (1)
Note. Holographic stereograms are classified in
subclass 23. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 9, | for synthetically generating holograms. |
| 23, | for holographic stereograms. |
|
| | |
| 23 | Holographic stereogram: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 22. Subject matter including a series of holograms made from
a series of two-dimensional pictures of a three-dimensional
object, each picture representing a different parallactic
view of the object, and upon readout the hologram series represents
a three-dimensional view to an observer.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 9, | for synthetically generating a hologram. |
| 462+, | for nonholographic stereoscopic devices. |
|
| | |
| 24 | Superimposed holograms only: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 22. Subject matter in which the plurality of holograms are fully
overlapped on the same recording medium only.
| | (1)
Note. Typical subject matter of this subclass include (a) holograms
made with multicolor illumination and (b) systems using
spatial frequency multiplexing or pupil separation. | |
| | |
| 25 | Discrete hologram only: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 22. Subject matter in which the plurality of holograms are arranged
in a side-by-side relationship on only one integral
recording medium or have an equivalent fixed side-by-side
spatial relationship to each other such as in a frame having windows
containing the holo-grams.
| | (1)
Note. Space division multiplexing systems wherein
holograms are discretely recorded and interlaced are included here. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 23, | for holographic stereograms. |
|
| | |
| 26 | Sequential frames on moving film: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 25. Subject matter in which the plurality of holograms will, upon
readout, produce images whose spatial location will move
as a function of the movement of the holograms and in which movement
of the holograms is used to provide for sequential readout of the
individual images at a fixed location in space.
| | (1)
Note. Holographic movies or books and holograms
of time varying electrical signals are typical of the subject matter included
here. | |
| | |
| 27 | Having particular laser source: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter including a laser as a light source wherein
the physical or chemical internal structure of the laser is explicity
defined.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for lasers, per
se. |
|
| | |
| 29 | Fourier transform holography: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter where the transmission factor of a hologram
closely approximates a Fourier integral.
| | (1)
Note. The Fourier Transform, F(w), of
a function, f(t), is given by | |
| | |
| 30 | Having optical element between object and recording medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter comprising systems for producing holograms
in which an optical element, such as a lens, grating, mask, or
mirror is located in the path of the light between the object whose
image is to be recorded and the holographic recording medium and
systems for reconstructing an image from such holograms in which
an equivalent optical element having an equivalent spatial location
relative to the holo-gram must be used during readout. |
| | |
| 31 | Focused image holography: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 30. Subject matter in which an image of the intelligence to
be recorded is formed on, in, or very close to
the recording medium when producing a hologram or in which an image
is formed on, in, or very close to the hologram
during readout. |
| | |
| 33 | Real image: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 32. Subject matter for reconstructing a hologram made of an
image formed by light collected at a single point as opposed to
a virtual image. |
| | |
| 34 | With optical waveguide: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 1. Subject matter including one or more optically transparent
elongated structures (e.g., rods, fibers, or
waveguides) are used to transmit light rays from one point
to another through modal transmission or within the confines of their
outer surfaces through internal reflection.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 385, | Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical waveguides, per
se. |
|
| | |
| 107 | OPTICAL COMPUTING WITHOUT DIFFRACTION: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein basic and more involved mathematical
processes of comparing, adding, substracting, multiplying, dividing, integrating, etc., are
performed by optical elements on an optical beam prior to any conversion
to another form of energy.
| | (1)
Note. The optical beam itself performs the computing. |
| | (2)
Note. The computing of this and the indented subclass
optically works on a single input optical beam to produce a desired
output optical beam, but this optical computing is not
intended to encompass convolution (crosscorrela-tion) or
correlation functions performed by a diffration grating. |
| | (3)
Note. Electrical computing for optical purposes without
any computation using an optical beam is classified elsewhere. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 560, | for convolution or cross-correlation using
a diffraction grating. |
| 561, | for correlation using a diffraction grating. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 235, | Registers,
subclasses 200+ for fluid logic. |
| 700, | Data Processing: Generic Control Systems
or Specific Applications, appropriate subclasses. |
| 701, | Data Processing: Vehicles, Navigation, and
Relative Location, appropriate subclasses. |
| 702, | Data Processing: Measuring, Calibrating, or
Testing, appropriate subclasses. |
| 703, | Data Processing: Structural Design, Modeling, Simulation, and
Emulation, appropriate subclasses. |
| 704, | Data Processing: Speech Signal Processing, Linguistics, Language
Translation, and Audio Compression/Decompression, appropriate subclasses. |
| 705, | Data Processing: Financial, Business Practice, Management, or
Cost/Price Determination, appropriate subclasses. |
| 706, | Data Processing: Artificial Intelligence, appropriate subclasses. |
| 708, | Electrical Computers: Arithmetic Processing
and Calculating, appropriate subclasses. |
| 709, | Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Multiple
Computer or Process Coordinating, appropriate subclasses. |
| 710, | Electrical Computers and Digital Data Processing
Systems: Input/Output, appropriate subclasses. |
| 711, | Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Memory, appropriate subclasses. |
| 712, | Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Processing
Architectures and Instruction Processing (e.g., Processors), appropriate subclasses. |
| 713, | Electrical Computers and Digital Processing Systems: Support, appropriate subclasses. |
| 714, | Error Detection/Correction and Fault Detection/Recovery, appropriate subclasses. |
| 716, | Computer-Aided Design and Analysis of
Circuits and Semiconductor Masks, appropriate subclasses. |
| 717, | Data Processing: Software Development, Installation, and
Management, appropriate subclasses. |
|
| | |
| 108 | Logic gate: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 107. Subject matter wherein the optical beam performs the operation
known to be performed by an AND, OR, NOR, NOT, etc., gate
and the optical beam output is the resultant of the relationship
of all the input optical beams as designed prior to the application
of the optical beams.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 235, | Registers,
subclasses 200+ for fluid gates. |
| 326, | Electronic Digital Logic Circuitry, for electrical digital logic circuits. |
| 700, | Data Processing: Generic Control Systems
or Specific Applications,
subclass 89 for data processing control system with specific
algorithm. |
|
| | |
| 196.1 | DEFLECTION USING A MOVING ELEMENT: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter related to offsetting or altering the direction
of at least a portion of a light incident onto a light reflecting
or transmitting element (i.e., optical
element) such as lens, mirror, prism, etc., by
translating, rotating, oscillating, or
otherwise repositioning the element with respect to the light path.
| | (1)
Note. A prism may be employed for refracting or reflecting
light. Prism reflections are considered to be internal reflections; that
is, the light is inside the prism body before and immediately
after reflection. Light beam deflection by a movable prism
is included in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. Lenses or curved surface mirrors movable for
focusing are classified elsewhere in this class. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 227, | through 236, for light control by an opaque element or medium
movable in or through light path. |
| 298, | through 320, for light wave directional modulation. |
| 577, | through 590, for light control by light interference. |
| 642, | through 830, for lenses, per se. |
| 831, | through 837, for prisms, per se. |
| 838, | through 884, for mirrors, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 503.1 through 504+for an invisible radiation source with a radiation
modifying member, in general, and subclasses 505.1-519.1, for
radiation controlling elements per se, exclusive of infrared, visible
and ultraviolet types. |
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 195 through 205for mechanical-optical scanning by moving
a lens or refractor. |
|
| | |
| 197.1 | Using a periodically moving element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 196.1. Subject matter wherein the moving of the light reflecting
or transmitting element occurs at regular intervals.
| | (1)
Note. The motion of the light reflective or transmitting
element or medium as a result of vehicle vibration, vehicle
wheel motion, wind action, etc., is
considered to be of an irregular nature and not periodic within
the meaning of this definition. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 227, | through 236, for light control by an opaque element or medium
movable in or through a light path. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 195 through 205for mechanical-optical scanning. |
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclass 84 for high speed cameras which use rotating optical
elements and subclasses 105-120 for motion picture optical
rectifiers using rotating or scanning optical elements. |
| 358, | Facsimile and Static Presentation Processing,
subclasses 474 through 498for a facsimile scanning signal generator. |
|
| | |
| 198.1 | With particular mount or driver for element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 197.1. Subject matter includes details of structure to support
or move the element periodically.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 221.2, | for deflection of light wherein the deflection element
or medium further comprises detail structure for supporting or moving
the non-periodically moving element. |
|
| | |
| 199.1 | Oscillating driver: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 198.1. Subject matter includes means to move the element back and
forth repetitively.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 213.1, | for light deflection wherein the reflective moving
element is an oscillating reflective element. |
|
| | |
| 199.2 | Electrostatically driven: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 199.1. Subject matter wherein the oscillating driver is powered
via an electrical device having an energy source pertaining to an
electric charge or field alone, without interaction with
magnetic influence.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 200.6, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
is moved by a non-oscillating electrostatic driver. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 310, | Electrical Generator or Motor Structure,
subclasses 309 and 310 for an electrical generator or motor structure wherein
the electrical charge or potential is of static electricity. |
|
| | |
| 199.3 | Electromagnetically driven: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 199.1. Subject matter wherein the oscillating driver is powered
via an electromotive force in a conductor when there is a change
in magnetic flux through the conductor.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 200.7, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
is moved by a non-oscillating electromagnetic driver. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 310, | Electrical Generator or Motor Structure,
subclass 90.5 for an electrical generator or motor further comprising bearings
having an induction field. |
|
| | |
| 199.4 | Electromechanically driven: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 199.1. Subject matter wherein the oscillating driver is powered
via an electrical to mechanical conversion device.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 200.8, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
is driven by a non-oscillating electromechanical driver. |
|
| | |
| 200.1 | Bearing or shaft for rotary driver: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 199.1. Subject matter wherein the oscillating driver is powered
via an electrical to mechanical conversion device.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 221.3, | for bearings or a shaft for a non-periodic
rotary driver. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 310, | Electrical Generator or Motor Structure,
subclass 90.5 for an electrical generator or motor further comprising bearings
having an induction field. |
| 384, | Bearings,
subclasses 91 through 623for bearings, per se. |
|
| | |
| 200.2 | Specific shaft material or structure (e.g. ceramic
ring): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 200.1. Subject matter wherein the shaft has a defined shape
or configuration or having a particular compositional make up.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 221.4, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
further comprises a specific shaft material or structure for a non-periodic
rotary driver. |
|
| | |
| 200.4 | Fluid pressure bearing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 200.1. Subject matter including structural details of fluid
under pressure provided between the bearing and the rotating shaft
to reduce the friction between them during the rotation.
| | (1)
Note. Fluid bearings are also called hydrostatic
or gas bearings, and are bearings which support load on
a thin layer of liquid or gas. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 384, | Bearings,
subclasses 100 through 124for fluid bearings, per se. |
|
| | |
| 200.6 | Electrostatic driver: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 198.1. Subject matter wherein the driver is powered via an
electrical device having an energy source pertaining to an electric
charge or field alone, without interaction with magnetic
influence.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 199.2, | for light deflection wherein the element is moved
by an electrostatic oscillating driver. |
|
| | |
| 200.7 | Electromagnetic driver: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 198.1. Subject matter wherein the driver is powered via an electromotive
force in a conductor when there is a change in magnetic flux through
the conductor.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 199.3, | for light deflection wherein a periodically moving
element further comprises an electromagnetic oscillating driver. |
|
| | |
| 200.8 | Electromechanical driver: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 198.1. Subject matter wherein the driver is powered via an
electrical to mechanical conversion device.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 199.4, | for light deflection wherein a periodically moving
element further comprises an electromechanical oscillating driver. |
|
| | |
| 202.1 | X-Y scanners: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 201.1. Subject matter wherein the multiple scanning elements
cause a deflection of light in two mutually perpendicular directions. |
| | |
| 204.2 | Including modulated light beam: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 204.1. Subject matter wherein at least one of the light beams
has its amplitude, frequency or phase modified in proportion
to an applied time varying signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 217.2, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
is a multifaceted rotating element that deflects modulated light. |
| 224.2, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
is a reflective element moved by a deformable support that deflects
modulated light. |
| 237, | through 236, for modulation,
per se. |
|
| | |
| 204.3 | Including polarized light beam: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 204.1. Subject matter wherein at least one of the light beams
is modified such that all electric field vectors are within the
same plane (plane polarized) or having vectors
within two orthogonal planes (elliptically polarized).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
|
| | |
| 204.5 | With diffraction grating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 204.1. Subject matter wherein the multiple light beams are
bent or deflected via a barrier or a series of narrow slits.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 207.7, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
is a post scanning element comprising a diffraction grating. |
| 211.6, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
further comprises non-periodically rotional diffracting grating. |
| 217.4, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
further comprises a non-periodically multifacted rotating reflective
element having a diffraction grating. |
| 558, | through 576, for diffraction, per
se. |
|
| | |
| 206.1 | High distortion lens (e.g., f-Theta
lens): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 205.1. Subject matter wherein the post scanning optical element
includes a lens producing an image such that the image height is
proportional to the scan angle (Theta).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 662, | for an f-Theta lens, per se. |
|
| | |
| 207.1 | Anamorphic elements: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 205.1. Subject matter including an optical element that produces
unequal image magnifications in two orthogonal planes.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 668, | for anamorphic lenses, per se. |
|
| | |
| 207.2 | Having an aspheric surface: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 207.1. Subject matter wherein the anamorphic optical element
has a non-spherical surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 708, | through 718, for lenses having aspherical
surfaces. |
|
| | |
| 207.6 | Cylindrical or toric lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 205.1. Subject matter wherein the post scanning optical element
consists of a lens with at least one surface that is formed like
a portion of a cylinder i.e., cylindrical
lens, or a lens having a main power in one meridian and
a minimum power in a perpendicular meridian, i.e., toric lens. |
| | |
| 207.7 | With diffraction portion or element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 205.1. Subject matter wherein the post scanning optical element
includes an edge, narrow slit or groove for bending or
deflecting light incident thereon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 204.5, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
further comprises a diffraction grating acting upon multi-beam
polarized light. |
| 211.6, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
further comprises non-periodically rotational diffracting
grating. |
| 217.4, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
further comprises a non-periodically multifacted rotating reflective
element having a diffraction grating. |
| 558, | through 576, for diffraction, per
se. |
|
| | |
| 207.8 | With reflecting prism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 205.1. Subject matter wherein the post scanning optical element
is a wedge-shaped transparent body consisting of plane
surfaces set at specified angles, some of these surfaces
transmit light and some reflect light, which causes the incident
light to traverse in succession.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 831, | through 837, for prisms, per
se. |
|
| | |
| 207.9 | Polarized beam: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 205.1. Subject matter wherein the light incident on the post scanning
optical element is modified such that all electric field vectors
are within the same plane (plane polarized) or
having vectors within two orthogonal planes (elliptically polarized).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 204.3, | for light deflection wherein the deflected light
beams are plural multiple polarized beams. |
|
| | |
| 207.11 | Thermal compensation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 205.1. Subject matter wherein the post scanning optical element
includes means to counteract operational effects due to changes
in temperature. |
| | |
| 208.1 | Concave reflector: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 205.1. Subject matter wherein the post scanning optical element
has an inwardly curved reflective surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 867, | through 869, for a concave cylindrical mirror
providing a line focus. |
|
| | |
| 210.1 | Moving lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 209.1. Subject matter wherein the transmissive element is
a transparent optical component with surfaces so curved such that
transmitted light is converged, diverged, or collimated.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 211.1, | for deflection of a light beam using a periodically
moving prism. |
| 642, | through 830, for lenses, per se. |
|
| | |
| 210.2 | Rotational lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 210.1. Subject matter wherein the moving lens moves about
an axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 226.1, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
is a non-periodic rotating reflective element. |
| 226.2, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
is a non-periodic rotating element. |
|
| | |
| 211.1 | Moving prism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 209.1. Subject matter wherein the transmissive element is
a transparent optical element having at least two (2) flat
surfaces angled relative to each other to refract the light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 210.1, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
is a moving lens. |
| 592, | through 595, for refracting elements employed in natural light
directing systems. |
| 606, | for prismoidal antiglare mirrors. |
| 618, | for plural path optical systems which divide or
combine light paths. |
| 831, | through 837, for a prism, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 51 for optical test devices having prisms used in
infrared or UV range alone and subclasses 300 – 334 for
prism-type spectroscopic instruments. |
|
| | |
| 211.5 | Rotating element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 209.1. Subject matter wherein the transmissive element moves
about an axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 210.2, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
is a rotational lens. |
| 211.2, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
is a rotational prism. |
|
| | |
| 211.6 | With diffraction grating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 211.5. Subject matter wherein the rotating element includes
an edge, narrow slit or groove for bending or deflecting
light incident thereon.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 204.5, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
further comprises a diffraction grating acting upon multi-beam
polarized light. |
| 207.7, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
is a post scanning element comprising a diffraction grating. |
| 217.4, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
further comprises a nonperiodically multifacated rotating reflective
element having a diffraction grating. |
| 558, | through 576, for diffraction, per se. |
|
| | |
| 212.1 | Reflective type moving element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 197.1. Subject matter wherein the periodically moving element
has a surface that returns the incident light back to its original
medium without changing its wavelength.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 207.8, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
further comprises post scanning reflecting prisms. |
| 838, | through 884, for reflective optical elements, per se. |
|
| | |
| 212.2 | Rotating reflective element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 212.1. Subject matter wherein the element moves about an
axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 210.2, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
is a rotating lens. |
| 211.2, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
is a rotational prism. |
| 211.5, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
is a rotating transmissive element. |
|
| | |
| 214.1 | Single plane mirror: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 213.1. Subject matter wherein the reflective element has a
unitary flat reflective surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 838, | through 884, for mirrors, per
se. |
|
| | |
| 217.2 | With beam modulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject matter wherein the light’s amplitude, frequency
or phase has been modified in proportion to an applied time varying
signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 204.2, | for scanners using multiple modulated light beams. |
| 224.2, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
is a reflective element moved by a deformable support that deflects
modulated light. |
| 237, | through 324, for modulation, per se. |
|
| | |
| 217.3 | Having vibration absorbing means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject matter including means to attenuate or eliminate
unwanted trembling motion of the moving element.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 207.11, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
having thermal compensation. |
|
| | |
| 217.4 | With diffractive element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject matter wherein the multifaceted rotating element
includes an edge, narrow slit or groove for bending or
deflecting the incident light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 204.5, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
further comprises a diffraction grating acting upon multi-beam
polarized light. |
| 207.7, | for light deflection wherein the deflection element
is a post scanning element comprising a diffraction grating. |
| 211.6, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
further comprises a non-periodically rotational diffraction
grating. |
|
| | |
| 218.1 | Having six, seven, or eight facets: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject matter wherein the number of reflecting surfaces
is greater than five and less than nine.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 219.1, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
is a multifaceted rotating element having five or fewer reflecting
surfaces. |
|
| | |
| 219.1 | Having five or fewer facets: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject matter wherein the number of reflecting surfaces
is less than six.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 218.1, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
is a multifaceted rotating element having more than five, but
less than nine, reflecting surfaces. |
|
| | |
| 219.2 | Inclined reflective elements: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 216.1. Subject matter wherein the reflective elements are disposed
at an angle relative to the rotational axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 217.1, | for a multifaceted reflective element wherein the
facets are parallel to the axis of rotation. |
|
| | |
| 221.2 | With particular mount or drive for element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 196.1. Subject matter includes details of structure to support
or move the element to deflect the light beam.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 198.1, | for light deflection comprising detailed structure
for supporting or moving a periodically moving element or medium. |
|
| | |
| 221.3 | Bearing or shaft for rotary driver: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 221.2. Subject matter includes structural details of the load
support or the axle member to which torque is applied to cause rotation
of the driver.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 200.1, | for light deflection wherein the deflecting element
further comprising bearings or shaft for a periodic rotary driver. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 384, | Bearings,
subclasses 91 through 623for bearings, per se. |
|
| | |
| 222.1 | By frustrated total internal reflection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 196.1. Subject matter wherein light is deflected via light
leakage at a total reflecting interface of a first reflective surface
when a second reflective surface is placed in proximity of the first.
| | (1)
Note. When light is incident on a reflective surface
and undergoes total internal reflection, by bringing a
second element or medium into proximity with the first surface, total
internal reflection becomes frustrated and the light beam is no
longer total internal reflection, but instead, is passed
into the second element or medium. | |
| | |
| 223.1 | By moving a reflective element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 196.1. Subject matter wherein the direction of at least a
portion of an incident light beam is offset or changed by repositioning
an optical element which returns incident light without changing its
wavelength.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 207.8, | for light beam deflection having a reflective prism
after the moving element (i.e. post scanning). |
| 291, | through 295, for light control by deforming or flexing a reflector. |
| 838, | through 884, for a reflector or mirror, per
se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclass 230 for reflection-type light valves used
in photocell systems. |
| 324, | Electricity: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 97 for galvanometers of the light beam type. |
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 203 through 205for mechanical-optical scanning by a moving
reflector. |
|
| | |
| 224.1 | Reflective element moved by deformable support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223.1. Subject matter wherein structure holding the element
is extended, flexed or contracted to modify the position
of the reflecting element.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 199.3, | for light beam deflection wherein the reflecting
element itself is extended, flexed or contracted. |
|
| | |
| 224.2 | Modulated light beam: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 224.1. Subject matter wherein the light’s amplitude, frequency
or phase is modified in proportion to an applied time varying signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 204.2, | for scanners using multiple modulated light beams. |
| 217.2, | for modulated light reflected by a multifaceted
rotating element. |
| 291, | through 295, for optical modulation by altering the shape or
contour of the light control surface. |
|
| | |
| 226.1 | Rotating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 223.1. Subject matter wherein the reflective element rotates
about an axis which does not pass through the element. |
| | |
| 226.3 | Fluid filled medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 196.1. Subject matter wherein the element comprises a liquid or
gas.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 228, | for light control by a movable opaque element or
medium including a gas or liquid. |
| 665, | for a fluid lens, per se. |
| 886, | for a fluid filter, per se. |
|
| | |
| 227 | LIGHT CONTROL BY OPAQUE ELEMENT OR MEDIUM MOVABLE IN OR THROUGH
LIGHT PATH: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter comprising the control of the amount of light
transmitted through an area defined by an optical beam via an element
or material, which is either completely opaque or opaque
only in certain portions whereas the other portions are transparent, by (1) selectively
intercepting the light path by the element or (2) changing
the orientation of the element within the light path.
| | (1)
Note. Where the element is not substantially opaque, but
is used to reduce the light intensity, the subject matter
is not classified here but in subclass 889. |
| | (2)
Note. Class 359 provides for optical diaphragms
and shutters, per se, in subclasses 227+ for
lenses combined with shutters generally in subclasses 738+, and
for lenses combined with diaphragms generally in subclasses 739+. However, a
camera shutter and diaphragm, per se, are classifiable
in Class 396, Photography, subclasses 452+ and subclasses
505+ respectively, the indicated use in cameras
or camera background being sufficient for classification in Class
396 as opposed to Class 359. Class 396 also provides for
lenses broadly or specifically combined with camera shutter or diaphragm
details, it being emphasized that such combinations involving
noncamera shutters or diaphragms or plural disclosures of utility
are classified in subclasses 738+ and 739+ of
Class 359 as indicated above. The combination of a lens
broadly or specifically claimed and a camera shutter or diaphragm
broadly claimed are classifiable in subclasses 738+ and
739+ of this class (359). |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 196.1 | through 226.3, for light deflection by a moving element. |
| 738+, | for light controlling means combined with a lens. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 396, | Photography, particularly
subclasses 452+ and 505+ for shutters and diaphragms used
in cameras and see (2) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 228 | Fluid: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter including a liquid or gas.
| | (1)
Note. The fluid itself or an element in the fluid
may constitute the light controlling element. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 296, | for realignment or repositioning of particles (possibly
opaque) suspended in a fluid in response to an applied
field. |
| 665+, | for a fluid lens. |
| 886, | for a fluid filter. |
|
| | |
| 229 | With glare or flicker elimination: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter comprising structure for equalizing light
intensity reaching the eye or for reducing glare or flicker.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 601+, | for generic glare reduction. |
|
| | |
| 230 | Electro-mechanical: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter wherein electrical energy is used to control
the movement of the light controlling element.
| | (1)
Note. This includes solenoid and tuning fork structures
and electrostatic type effects. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 228, | for electro-mechanically controlled light
control systems using a liquid. |
|
| | |
| 231 | String or ribbon type: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 230. Subject matter wherein electric current is applied across
a resilient, electrically conducting opaque element which
as a result of its location in the field of an electromagnet vibrates, thus
interrupting a light path or a portion thereof in accordance with
variations in the current or in the strength of the field of the electromagnet. |
| | |
| 232 | Slit type: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter wherein the light controlling structure comprises
a pair of jaws having opposed parallel edges which can be moved toward
or away from each other and which can be fixed in a variety of intermediate
positions between fully open and fully closed.
| | (1)
Note. Typically the location of the center of the
slit remains fixed. | |
| | |
| 234 | With rotating or pivoting element (e.g., scanning
discs): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 227. Subject matter comprising means wherein the light control
results from revolving, completely or partially, an
opaque element or an element containing opaque and transparent portions.
| | (1)
Note. Included here are generic optical shutters
or diaphragms, per se, which have rotating vanes
or blades. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 229, | for similar subject matter used in reducing glare. |
| 233, | for two relative moving apertured elements which
may rotate. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 201.1+ for scanning elements of this type used in photo-cell
controlled optical systems and subclass 232 for the combination
of a light chopper and photocell. |
|
| | |
| 235 | Continuously rotating apertured element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 234. Subject matter wherein the light controlling element revolves
nonstop during the operation of the device.
| | (1)
Note. Apertures as used here encompass slots removed
around the periphery of an otherwise opaque element. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 233, | for relative motion of two apertured elements where
one may be continuously rotating. |
|
| | |
| 237 | OPTICAL MODULATOR: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein an optical element varies a characteristic
of a traversing optical light beam in direct proportion to an applied time-varying
signal which may be in any energy form.
| | (1)
Note. Characteristics of a traversing light beam
that may be varied include its direction or characteristics such
as amplitude, frequency, phase, or polarization. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 109+, | for optical communication systems or devices which
may include an optical modulator. |
| 325, | for an optical demodulator, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 200+ for photocell circuit and subclasses 503.1+ for
an invisible radiation source with a radiation modifying member, generally. |
| 332, | Modulators, appropriate subclasses for modulators of an electrical
wave. |
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 195+ for mechanical-optical scanning. |
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclass 84 for high speed cameras which use rotating optical
elements and subclasses 105+ for motion picture optical
rectifiers using roatating or scanning optical elements. |
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for lasers including internal
light control apparatus. |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclasses 1+ and 4+ for light wave modulation within
an optical waveguide. |
| 396, | Photography, particularly
subclasses 452+ and 505+ for shutters and diaphragms used
in cameras and see (2) Note in subclass 227 above. |
|
| | |
| 238 | Light wave temporal modulation (e.g., frequency, amplitude, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter wherein a device varies a property of light
which is a function of time only as it traverses the device where
such variation is in accordance with the applied varying signal which
can be of any energy form.
| | (1)
Note. Such properties of the traversing light include
amplitude, frequency, or phase. |
| | (2)
Note. Optical modulation occuring exclusively within
a waveguide is classified in Class 385. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 298+, | for directional modulation. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclasses 1+ for light temporal modulation inside of a waveguide. |
|
| | |
| 240 | Changing bulk optical parameter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 238. Subject matter comprising structure for controlling a light
parameter by changing a bulk optical parameter of an optically transmitting medium.
| | (1)
Note. "Bulk optical parameter" refers
to those inherent internal characteristics of an optical element
which can be defined by mathematical expressions describing their
effect on light radiation (e.g., index of
refraction, transmissivity, etc.) and which
can be changed without producing a significant change in the shape, size, or contours
of the optical element itself. |
| | (2)
Note. Included here are devices in which an optical
parameter of the light control element is changed as a result of an
applied electrical or magnetic field, an applied acoustic
wave, a change in chemical structure, or by any
other mechanism which primarily alters the bulk optical parameters
rather than the physical shape, size, or contours
of an optical medium. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 577+, | for light control by light interference. |
| 738+, | for light controlling structure combined with a
lens. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 345, | Computer Graphics Processing and Selective Visual
Display Systems,
subclasses 48+ and 84+ for selective electrical control
of displays having light-controlling display elements. |
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators, appropriate subclasses for lasers including light
control means. |
|
| | |
| 242 | Display device: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter wherein the temporal modulation is in an
information conveying element.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 345, | Computer Graphics Processing and Selective Visual
Display Systems,
subclasses 1.1 through 3.4for visual display systems with selective electrical
control. |
|
| | |
| 243 | Bistable device: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter wherein an optical device has two distinct, stable
output states which toggle between one another by a single application
of actinic radiation. |
| | |
| 244 | Opto-optical device: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 241. Subject matter wherein the temporal modulation is achieved
by an externally applied modulating light wave. |
| | |
| 245 | Electro-optic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter wherein the optical properties (e.g., index
of refraction) of an optical element are changed in response
to an applied electrical signal. |
| | |
| 247 | Using reflective or cavity structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter wherein the modulation is effected by structure
which redirects the entire beam or a part of the beam at an angle
equal to that of incidence, or wherein the medium through
which the beam passes is confined in a cavity.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 302, | for reflecting structures used in beam deflection. |
|
| | |
| 248 | Semiconductor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 247. Subject matter wherein barrier layer (i.e., semiconducting) material
is used in the modulating structure, generally, as
a variable reflector. |
| | |
| 249 | Compensation technique: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter wherein unwanted effects due to the action
of the medium or the field on the beam such as those due to temperature, birefringences, or
color are eliminated.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 250, | for plural mediums in the beam path where the plural
mediums are not for the purpose of compensation. |
|
| | |
| 250 | Using plural mediums: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter wherein more than one medium or structure, each
of which modulates the beam, are provided.
| | (1)
Note. The mediums or structures in the beam path, layered
mediums transverse to the beam path or parallel paths, each containing
a medium where the output beam is the result of the combined action of
the medium or structure. Not all of the mediums need to
be field responsive. |
| | (2)
Note. Initial polarizers and final analyzers are
not considered part of the plural mediums where the only affect
is to select a polarization. Plural areas formed by a matrix
of electrodes whose sole function is to act on a portion of the beam
are not considered plural mediums. Nonbirefringent lenses
are also not considered a medium in the sense of the definition. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 249, | for plural mediums where the purpose of the mediums
is compensation. |
| 301+, | for plural mediums used to deflect the beam or a
portion of the beam. |
| 489.01, | through 489.15, for polarization achieved by plural birefringent
elements. |
|
| | |
| 252 | With particular medium or state of the medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter wherein the details of the medium structure, state
of the medium, shape of the medium, or treatment
of the medium are recited.
| | (1)
Note. For classification herein, there should
be more than just the recitation of the name or abbreviation of
the name of the material. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 251, | where details of the medium are combined with a
particular field direction. |
| 485.01, | through 489.15, for a particular medium used for reflectively or refractively
polarizing light. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 23, | Chemistry: Physical Processes, for preparation or treatment of nonmetallic elements
involving only physical treatments. |
| 252, | Compositions, for compositions, per se. |
| 264, | Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes, for melt shaping or treatment of nonmetallic materials. |
| 423, | Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds, for nonmetallic elements and for processes for producing
nonmetallic elements involving a chemical reaction. |
|
| | |
| 253 | Liquid medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 252. Subject matter wherein the medium is in a nongaseous fluid
state.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 36+, | for similar structures using liquid crystals for
the medium. |
|
| | |
| 254 | With particular electrode structure or arrangement, or
medium mounting structure or arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter wherein the physical structure, geometry
or arrangement of the electrodes is detailed or there is detailed
mounting structure for the medium (e.g., to
prevent physical distortion).
| | (1)
Note. Included here are structures which perform
auxiliary functions such as protection or index matching. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 251, | for the arrangement of the electrodes as related
to the medium for a particular direction of the field in combination
with details of the medium. |
| 253, | for those structures used with a liquid medium where
the structure is peculiar to the medium. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 310, | Electrical Generator or Motor Structure,
subclasses 365+ for electrode arrangements with respect to a piezoelectric
element. |
|
| | |
| 255 | With particular field: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter wherein the field which modulates the medium
is of a specific magnitude, phase, or frequency
or is of a specific type (e.g., pulse).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 251, | for a field direction or polarization specified
in relation to the medium (e.g., crystal
cut). |
| 484.01, | through 484.1, for polarization by an applied magnetic field. |
|
| | |
| 256 | With birefringent element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter including an element having the property
of dividing a ray or beam of energy into two polarized rays or beams (known
as the ordinary and extraordinary rays), the directions of
polarization being at right angles to each other.
| | (1)
Note. A birefringent material which has been treated
with a dichroic dye to absorb the ordinary or extraordinary ray is
no longer considered to be birefrin-gent within the meaning
of this definition. A birefringent element in the form of
a Nicol prism, where the unwanted ray is deflected, is
classified here. | |
| | |
| 257 | Pockel’s cell: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 246. Subject matter wherein the variation of a polarized light
characteristic is achieved by an element which advances or retards
the phase of an induced ordinary wave relative to the extraordinary
wave when the electrical signal is applied. |
| | |
| 258 | Kerr cell: |
| | Subject matter under 246 wherein the variation of a polarized
light characteristic is achieved by an element including a material (usually
liquid) whose refractive index change is proportional to
the square of the field of the applied electrical signal. |
| | |
| 259 | Plural modulation cells: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter wherein the temporal light modulator utilizes
multiple elemental units each of which is electro-optically
controlled. |
| | |
| 260 | Etalon structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter wherein the modulating structure consists
of two parallel dielectric mirrors separated by an active electro-optic
material. |
| | |
| 262 | Excitation by electron beam: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter wherein a collimated ray of electrons applied
to the modulator is used to vary a temporal characteristic of the
light passing therethrough. |
| | |
| 263 | By reflection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter wherein the electro-optic temporal
modulator includes a single internal redirection of the light passing
therethrough. |
| | |
| 264 | Pulse Modulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter wherein a parameter of a train of optical
pulses is varied in accordance with the amplitude of the applied
signal.
| | (1)
Note. Pulse modulation may involve changes in pulse
amplitude (pam), pulse position (ppm), or
pulse duration (pdm). |
| | (2)
Note. Pulse modulation includes pulse-code
modulation wherein the light beam is transmitted as a digital binary
code. |
| | (3)
Note. This subclass will include a combination of
pulse modulation with amplitude, frequency, or
phase modulation. | |
| | |
| 265 | Electrochromic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter wherein the electrical signal applied to
the optical control element produces a color change in the element
resulting in a change in the absorption characteristics of the element
at a given wavelength of light.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 345, | Computer Graphics Processing and Selective Visual
Display Systems,
subclass 49 and 105 for selective electrical control of displays
having electrochromic display elements. |
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems, appropriate subclasses for liquid crystal light
modulators. |
|
| | |
| 267 | Reflection-type (e.g., display
device): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 265. Subject matter wherein the modulator utilizes a surface
upon which light strikes and which is coated with a material that
simultaneously changes color with the applied electrical signal and
reflects a significant portion of incident light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 275, | for transmission-type (e.g., windows). |
|
| | |
| 270 | Particular electrolyte layer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 267. Subject matter which recites details of an electrically
conductive liquid layer which transports ions between the electrochromic
material and the counter electrode. |
| | |
| 272 | Liquid cell: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 267. Subject matter wherein the device comprises a cell containing
a substance which is in a state intermediate that of a solid and
a gas. |
| | |
| 274 | Diverse layer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 267. Subject matter including a specified miscellaneous layer
within the reflection-type electrochromic device.
| | (1)
Note. This might include, for example, an
insulating layer. | |
| | |
| 275 | Transmission-type (e.g., windows): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 265. Subject matter wherein the modulator utilizes a surface
upon which light strikes which is coated with a material that simultaneously changes
color with the applied electrical signal and transmits a significant
portion of incident light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 267, | for reflection-type (e.g., display device). |
|
| | |
| 276 | Amplitude modulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter wherein the amplitude of a constant frequency
optical wave varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the
applied signal (i.e., modulating
signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 284, | for magneto-optic amplitude modulation. |
| 286, | for acousto-optic amplitude modulation. |
| 289, | for thermal-optic amplitude modulation. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 345, | Computer Graphics Processing and Selective Visual
Display Systems,
subclasses 48+ and 84+ for selective electrical control
of displays having light-controlling display elements. |
|
| | |
| 277 | Within display element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 276. Subject matter wherein the amplitude modulator is in an
information conveying element.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 345, | Computer Graphics Processing and Selective Visual
Display Systems,
subclasses 1.1 through 3.4for visual display systems with selective electrical
control. |
|
| | |
| 278 | Frequency modulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter wherein the frequency of a constant amplitude
optical wave (i.e., carrier wave) varies
in synchronization with the amplitude of the applied signal (i.e., modulating
signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 287, | for acousto-optic frequency modulation. |
|
| | |
| 279 | Phase modulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 245. Subject matter wherein the normal zero phase of a constant
amplitude optical wave (i.e., carrier
wave) is shifted by an angle proportional to the amplitude
of the applied signal (i.e., modulating
signal).
| | (1)
Note. A sinusoidal signal of zero phase will have
a zero amplitude at the intersection of the x-y axis. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 278, | for electro-optic frequency modulation. |
| 287, | for acousto-optic frequency modulation. |
|
| | |
| 280 | Magneto-optic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter wherein a bulk optical parameter of an optical
element is controlled by a magnetic signal applied to the element. |
| | |
| 282 | Using layered structure or plural mediums: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 281. Subject matter wherein the structure through which the beam
passes or is acted upon consists of more than one contiguous film
or layer which forms a composite structure which modulates the beam
or wherein there are plural mediums or structures in the beam path, each of
which modulates the beam.
| | (1)
Note. The composite structure can be dielectric
or reflective films or layers for the purposes such as compensation, increased
Kerr rotation or index (e.g., impedance) matching. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 250, | for plural mediums where at least one medium is
electric field responsive. |
| 254, | and 489.2, for layered structures where
the purpose of the layers is for such things as protection or index matching. |
| 485.03, | for layered structure or plural mediums formed for
polarization without modulation. |
| 487.01, | through 487.06, for layered structures formed with at least one
layer of dichroic material where additional layers may be provided
for purposes such as protection or particular bonding and for layered
structures formed for interference effects. |
| 489.15, | through 489.19, for plural mediums including a birefringent medium which
is not field responsive. |
|
| | |
| 283 | With particular direction of the field in relation to the
medium, beam direction or polarization: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 281. Subject matter wherein details of the medium are given, especially
crystal cut or orientation, and the direction of the applied
field is specified in relation to the medium or in relation to the
incident beam direction or polarization.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 281, | for magnetic modulating structures using a particular
medium, state of the medium, particular electrode
structure or arrangement, medium mounting structure or
arrangement or with a particular field. |
|
| | |
| 284 | Amplitude modulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 280. Subject matter wherein the amplitude of a constant frequency
optical wave varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the
applied signal (i.e., modulating
signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 276, | for electro-optic amplitude modulation. |
| 286, | for acousto-optic amplitude modulation. |
| 289, | for thermal-optic amplitude modulation. |
|
| | |
| 285 | Acousto-optic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter wherein an ultrasonic wave generated at the
surface or within the confines of the light control element sets
up conditions in the element which produce a change in the optical
parameters (e.g., refractive
index) directly controlling the light. |
| | |
| 286 | Amplitude modulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter wherein the amplitude of a constant frequency
optical wave varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the
applied signal (i.e., modulating
signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 276+, | for electro-optic amplitude modulation. |
| 284, | for magneto-optic amplitude modulation. |
| 289, | for thermal-optic amplitude modulation. |
|
| | |
| 287 | Frequency modulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 285. Subject matter wherein the frequency of a constant amplitude
optical wave (i.e., carrier wave) varies
in synchronization with the amplitude of the applied signal (i.e., modulating
signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 278, | for electro-optic frequency modulation. |
|
| | |
| 288 | Thermo-optic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 240. Subject matter wherein optical properties (e.g., index
of refraction) of an optical element are changed by or
in response to applied heat. |
| | |
| 289 | Amplitude modulation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 288. Subject matter wherein the amplitude of a constant frequency
optical wave varies in synchronization with the amplitude of the
applied signal (i.e., modulating
signal).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 276+, | for electro-optic amplitude modulation. |
| 284, | for magneto-optic amplitude modulation. |
| 286, | for acousto-optic amplitude modulation. |
|
| | |
| 290 | By changing physical characteristics (e.g., shape, size
or contours) of an optical element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 238. Subject matter wherein the light property is controlled
by a substantial alteration in the optical characteristics of a
light control surface or interface or by changing the physical shape, position, or
orientation of a light control surface or interface in response
to the modulating signal.
| | (1)
Note. Any change in or to the light control surface
or interface occur wholly within the region of the light path in which
control is effected. The control surface or interface
is neither totally nor partially inserted into nor removed from the
light path. | |
| | |
| 291 | Shape or contour of light control surface altered: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 290. Subject matter wherein the light property is controlled
by means of a light control surface which is temporarily altered
or modified in some way so as to produce distortions in the surface
contours which differ significantly from the normal or unmodified
surface contours. |
| | |
| 292 | Light control surface forms image on projected light beam: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 291. Subject matter wherein the contours of a light control surface
are modified in accordance with a control signal so as to impart
image or picture information to the contour of the control surface
which is then transferred to a light beam projected on or through
the control surface. |
| | |
| 296 | Changing position or orientation of suspended particles: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 290. Subject matter wherein the light control surface consists
of a group of elongated light absorbing or reflecting particles
suspended in a fluid media, which collectively change their
orientation within the light path in response to an applied signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 228, | for fluid light control elements. |
|
| | |
| 298 | Light wave directional modulation (e.g., deflection
or scanning is representative of the modulating signal): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 237. Subject matter wherein the relative spatial orientation
of a light wave exiting a device is changed in accordance with a
varying signal of any energy form (i.e., modulating
signal) applied to the device.
| | (1)
Note. Optical directional modulation occuring exclusively
inside of a waveguide is classified in Class 385. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 238+, | for light wave temporal modulation outside of a
waveguide. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclasses 4+ for optical directional modulation within an optical
waveguide. |
|
| | |
| 299 | Opto-optical device: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 298. Subject matter wherein the directional modulation is achieved
by an externally applied modulating light wave. |
| | |
| 300 | Phase conjugate: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 298. Subject matter including the return of a light beam through
the media at precisely the same angles, distances, and
intensities as prior to a reflection. |
| | |
| 301 | Acting on polarized light: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 298. Subject matter wherein the direction of a polarized light
beam is varied in accordance with a varying input signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 489.08, | through 489.13, for birefringent element beam deflection or splitting
for polarization without modulation or external input. |
|
| | |
| 302 | Using reflecting or cavity structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 301. Subject matter wherein the deflection is effected by structures
which redirect the entire beam or a part of the beam at an angle
equal to that of incidence or where the medium through which the
beam passes is confined in a cavity.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 247, | for reflecting structures used in beam temporal
modulation. |
|
| | |
| 303 | Using more than one polarization (e.g., digital): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 301. Subject matter wherein at least two distinct beams, corresponding
to two different polarizations, are obtained.
| | (1)
Note. The systems use a polarization modulation
element to switch the polarization of the incoming beam followed by
a birefringent polarization discriminator whereby two distinct beams
are obtained corresponding to the ordinary and extraordinary rays. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 302, | for reflecting structures where different polarizations
are used. |
|
| | |
| 304 | Using single polarization: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 301. Subject matter wherein the beam is given an initial polarization
and then deflected or where only one polarization is allowed to
be deflected by blocking or removing any other polarization component. |
| | |
| 305 | Acousto-optic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 298. Subject matter wherein directional modulation is achieved
by applying a modulating sound wave to a device through which a
light beam is traversing. |
| | |
| 306 | Correlation or convolution: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter wherein the correlation or convolution integral
of two optical waves is formed by an acousto-optical directional
modulator. |
| | |
| 308 | Filter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter wherein one frequency band present in an
incident light beam is suppressed by an acousto-optic deflection
technique. |
| | |
| 311 | Plural transducers on single cell: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 305. Subject matter wherein the directional modulator consists
of a single element having multiple input devices each capable of
imposing a separate sound wave on the modulator. |
| | |
| 315 | Electro-optic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 298. Subject matter wherein directional modulation is achieved
by applying a varying electrical signal to an element through which
a light beam is traversing. |
| | |
| 316 | Plural modulation cells: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 315. Subject matter wherein the directional light modulator utilizes
multiple elemental units each of which is electro-optically
controlled. |
| | |
| 318 | By reflection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 315. Subject matter wherein the electro-optic directional
modulator includes a single internal redirection of the light passing
therethrough. |
| | |
| 319 | Focusing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 315. Subject matter wherein light beam focusing is achieved by
the application of the electrical signal to a device through which
the beam transits. |
| | |
| 320 | Switching: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 315. Subject matter wherein a discrete change in the path of
a light beam is achieved by the application of the electrical signal
to a device through which the beam transits |
| | |
| 322 | Electro-optic crystal material: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 321. Subject matter wherein the material of the modulator is
particularly responsive to an applied electrical signal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 245, | electro-optic light wave temporal modulation
for changing bulk optical parameter. |
|
| | |
| 323 | PLZT material: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 322. Subject matter wherein the material is a transparent lead-lanthanum
zir- conate titanate ceramic with optical qualities that
can be controlled by applying voltages to thin plates of the material. |
| | |
| 325 | OPTICAL DEMODULATOR: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein an original modulating wave is recovered
from a previously modulated light wave.
| | (1)
Note. These devices may include a photodetector
as long as a modulating wave is isolated. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 189+, | for optical communication receivers which include
an optical demodulator. |
| 237+, | for an optical modulator, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 200+ for photocell circuits and systems which convert
light wave energy into electricity. |
| 329, | Demodulators, for electrical demodulators in general. |
|
| | |
| 326 | OPTICAL FREQUENCY CONVERTER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a nonlinear device alters the frequency
of an applied traversing optical electromagnetic wave.
| | (1)
Note. The frequencies here are quasi-optical (i.e., infrared
through ultraviolet). |
| | (2)
Note. Such optical frequency devices include second
harmonic generators and other types of frequency conversion devices
such as downshifters, oscillators, mixers, etc. |
| | (3)
Note. A detailed optical frequency converter, per
se, or such subject matter in combination with additional
waveguide structure is classified in this class (359). However, the
nominal recitation of any type of optical frequency converter together
with additional waveguide structure is classified in Class 385, where
such combination meets the class requirements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 307, | Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,
subclass 424 for a nonoptical parametric frequency converter. |
| 327, | Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
Systems,
subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency control. |
|
| | |
| 327 | Raman type: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 326. Subject matter wherein the nonlinear optical device involves
radiation-active materials in which many lines of frequency-shifted
radiation can be obtained in response to incident radiation.
| | (1)
Note. Raman radiation is a radiation produced in
response to incident radiation by a change in the rotational or vibrational
energy of scattering molecules. The resultant optical radiation
is often referred to as Stokes or antiStokes radiation dependent
upon its frequency relative to that of the incident light. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 334, | for a Raman optical amplifier. |
|
| | |
| 328 | Harmonic generator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 326. Subject matter wherein a nonlinear optical device generates
a wave having a frequency which is an integral multiple of a fundamental input
wave frequency.
| | (1)
Note. A wave with twice the frequency of the fundamental
is called the second harmonic. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 240, | for light wave temporal modulation via a nonlinear
device. |
| 255, | for electro-optic polarization modulation
by a nonlinear device. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 307, | Electrical Transmission or Interconnection Systems,
subclass 424 for a nonoptical parametric frequency converter. |
| 327, | Miscellaneous Active Electrical Nonlinear Devices, Circuits, and
Systems,
subclasses 113+ for miscellaneous frequency control such as electrical wave
harmonic generation. |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclass 122 for optical fiber waveguide with cladding having
significant nonlinear property. |
|
| | |
| 329 | Third harmonic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 328. Subject matter wherein the generated optical wave has a
frequency that is three times that of the fundamental input optical
wave. |
| | |
| 330 | Parametric oscillator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 326. Subject matter wherein the frequency conversion of electromagnetic
radiation, in the near and the visible spectrum, is
based on the nonlinear dependence of polarizability on wave amplitude.
| | (1)
Note. A parametric oscillation is an oscillation
in which substantial power is applied at a frequency called the
pump frequency. Signal and idler waves, the sum
of whose frequencies equals the pump frequency, are generated
in an interaction resulting from some nonlinear effect in the optical
crystal. | |
| | |
| 331 | Optical laser acoustic delay line type: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 326. Subject matter wherein the output from a laser is mode-locked
and passed through an acoustic cell in which a radio frequency acoustic
wave has been generated; the laser beam is diffracted, and
one of the frequency shifted diffracted modes is heterodyned at
a detector with an unshifted mode to produce a time delayed radio
frequency output signal lower in frequency than the input signal. |
| | |
| 332 | Dielectric optical waveguide type: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 326. Subject matter wherein the depletion layer of a semiconductor
whose dielectric material exhibits nonlinear susceptibility is used
as an optical waveguide to achieve frequency translation.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 374, | Thermal Measuring and Testing,
subclass 177 for an electrical thermometer having a ferroelectric
sensor. |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclasses 129+ for a planar optical waveguide. |
|
| | |
| 333 | OPTICAL AMPLIFIER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein the amplifying device produces an
output light beam which is only changed to increase the magnitude
of a light beam applied as input.
| | (1)
Note. This amplification can be produced by applying
electrical energy to the device to first cause excitation to a higher
energy level via certain molecular, atomic, or
nuclear particles of a substance and later causing the high energy state
to be relaxed to a lower state to produce the emission of the particles. |
| | (2)
Note. This amplifcation is the optical or quasi-optical
wavelength range, which is generally in the range from
ultra-violet (100 Angstroms) to far infrared (10
million Angstroms) of the optical spectrum. See (1) Note
of subclass 350 for specific IR and UV wavelength units. |
| | (3)
Note. This subclass necessitates light input into
a medium prior to amplification. Production of a light
beam output without an input light beam is classified in Class 372. |
| | (4)
Note. This subclass includes details of an optical
amplifier wherein amplification is produced within the optical fiber by
the interaction of externally applied energy and a unique property
of the fiber (e.g., lazing material).
The mere nominal recitation of an optical amplifier in combination
with an optical waveguide structure is classified in Class 385. |
| | (5)
Note. Infrared to Ultraviolet light emitting junction
is classified in Class 357, subclass 17, unless
a cavity is set forth for Class 372 or amplification is set forth for
this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 109+, | for optical communication. |
| 237+, | for optical modulators external to an optical fiber. |
| 326+, | for optical frequency translators. |
| 341.1, | for details of an optical amplifier wherein amplification
is produced within the fiber optics, wherein the optical
fiber has some unique property (i.e., lasting
material), to produce the amplification when external
energy is applied. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 219, | Electric Heating,
subclasses 121.6+ for metal heating by arc using a laser. |
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 200+ for photocells, circuits and apparatus, and subclasses
552+ for solid state light emitting source which is detected
by a photocell. |
| 257, | Active Solid-State Devices (e.g., Transistors, Solid-State
Diodes),
subclasses 80 through 85for incoherent light emitting devices combined
with, or also constituting a light responsive device. |
| 313, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
subclass 371 for a cathode-ray tube with optics and
subclass 372 for a cathode-ray tube with light conducting
fiber or rod. |
| 342, | Communications: Directive Radio Wave
Systems and Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio
Navigation),
subclass 53 for the combination with an infrared device, and
subclass 54 for the combination with a laser. |
| 348, | Television,
subclass 217 and 300 for camera with image intensifier or amplifier, subclass
707 for television amplifier circuit and subclass 777 for cathode-ray
tube image source with intensifier. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examinating, Vision Testing, and
Correcting,
subclass 213 including light filter or absorber, subclass
214 including diaphragm or slit, and subclass 215 including
light polarizing. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclasses 300+ for dispersed light spectroscopy. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclass 32 for light fibers, rods or pipes, subclass
259 for laser type light source (or support therefor) and
modifier, and subclasses 317+ for light modifier. |
| 365, | Static Information Storage and Retrieval,
subclass 108 for liquid crystal memory and subclasses 120+ for
information masking using polarization, Bragg cells, diffraction, holograms
electron beams, etc. |
| 369, | Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval,
subclasses 110.01 through 110.04where the information is stored or retrieved from
the medium by polarized radiant energy; subclass 116 where
the infor is stored or retrieved from the medium by light intensity
adjustment or maintenance; and subclass 117 where the information
is stored or retrieved from the medium by a movable shutter or light gate. |
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators, for lasers and optical oscillators wherein a light output
beam is generated without the application of a light input beam. |
| 376, | Induced Nuclear Reactions: Processes, Systems, and
Elements,
subclass 103 for photon beam (e.g., laser) irradiation
nuclear fusion, subclass 104 for optics nuclear fusion, and
subclass 105 for particle beam irradiation (excluding photons) nuclear
fusion. |
| 377, | Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or
Shift Registers: Circuits and Systems,
subclass 102 for bistable electro - optical devices. |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclasses 1+ for temporal optical modulation produced within
the fiber, and subclasses 4+ for directional modulation
produced within the fiber. Class 385 contains patents
claiming optical modulation within the fiber but optical amplification (333+) or
frequency translation (326+) within the
fiber are specifially excluded from Class 385, unless the
amplifier or frequency translator are only nominally set forth. |
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 163.1+ for processes of coating an optical polarizer, windshield, fiber, waveguide, rod, projection
screen, or retroreflector. |
| 430, | Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof,
subclass 363 for laser or radiation color imaging exposure other
than visible light and subclass 945 for laser beam cross-reference
art collection. |
|
| | |
| 334 | Raman or Brillouin process: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein the scattered light beam output from
a medium, resulting from either the Raman or Brillouin
effects, is amplified relative to the input to the medium.
| | (1)
Note. The Raman effect claimed specifically for
the optical amplification properties is classified in this subclass, whereas
the Raman effect claimed for the frequency translation by itself
or together with optical amplification is classified in subclass
327. |
| | (2)
Note. Stimulated Raman effect is the amplification
exhibiting the characteristic of stimulated emission of the small portion
of light that is scattered in random directions when a monochromatic light
beam of high intensity is transmitted through matter.
The characteristic of the small portion of light is related to the frequencies
of the matter. |
| | (3)
Note. The Raman effect results in the re-radiation
of light from a bombarded molecule, having a longer wavelength
than the original bombaring beam of coherent light. Part
of the energy of the coherent beam is distributed throughout the
molecule whereas the remaining energy is re-radiated.
This effect may be described as being feeble, instantaneous, independent
of absorption, independent of the wavelength of the exciting
radiation; and it results in the re-emission of
light generally having a wavelength longer than the existing one.
Although there is a difference in wavelengths or frequency between
the wavelengths of each re-emitted spectral line, or
Raman line, and the wavelength of the incident or exciting
radiation; the intensity of Raman increases as the fourth
power of the incident frequency except in the neighborhood of an
absorption band, where the scattering intensity increases
still more markedly. |
| | (4)
Note. Brillouin scattering is the nonlinear optical
phenomenon of the spontaneous scattering of light in a medium by
its interaction with sound waves passing through the medium |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 327, | for Raman type frequency translators. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclass 3 for Raman lasers without a light input beam. |
|
| | |
| 335 | Free electron: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein a beam of "free" and unbound
electrons of an atom or molecule are passed through an undulator (i.e., "wiggler"), which
creates a magnetic field of alternating polarity, to cause
the electrons to move along a helical path (i.e., "wiggle") for
the release of a high power light radiation (i.e., amplification of
the light input beam).
| | (1)
Note. The use of a free-electron laser
for light amplificatoin belongs in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclass 2 for free electron lasers and subclass 74 for electron
beam pumping without a light input beam. |
|
| | |
| 336 | Bistable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein a two level output is produced (i.e., an
amplified output or no output at all) dependent upon the
specific characteristic (e.g., amplitude
or frequency) of the input light beam that the amplifier
is designed to amplify.
| | (1)
Note. The specific type of amplifier (i.e., material
type, cavity structure, resonant cavity length, leachable
material, etc.) determines which input
signal characteristic will produce an amplified output.
All other inputs will result in a zero output. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 377, | Electrical Pulse Counters, Pulse Dividers, or
Shift Registers: Circuits and Systems,
subclass 102 using bistable electro-optical devices. |
|
| | |
| 337 | Correction of deleterious effects: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein an amplifier is corrected to overcome
actions that prohibit its proper operation.
| | (1)
Note. In order to overcome laser overheating, extraneous
gasses that prohibit population inversion, laser medium
losing energy that would deplete energy, an excess of power
density, etc., the correction is applied
to the optical amplifier itself. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclass 33 for particular operating compensation. |
|
| | |
| 337.1 | Spectral gain flattening or equalization: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter wherein the correction includes attenuating
the signal by nonsaturable absorption of at least part of the amplification
uniform over a range of the electromagnetic spectrum.
| | (1)
Note: Also referred to as gain tilt correction and
gain flattening. | |
| | |
| 337.11 | Feedback: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 337.1. Subject matter including a path that returns some output
back to the input of a circuit, wherein systems using this
path, optical or electrical, to effect increased
spectral uniformity, reduce or increase gain, etc.
| | (1)
Note. Controlling the frequency in a direction for
canceling an exciting voltage would be an example of a feedback circuit. | |
| | |
| 337.13 | Adjusting input signal power: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 337.11. Subject matter wherein the feedback circuit, for
the optical energies associated with amplified stimulated emission
light, compares a first and second wavelength, then
regulates the attenuation so that the optical energies are substantially
equal. |
| | |
| 337.21 | Grating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 337.2. Subject matter wherein the filter has a spatial intensity
pattern or photorefractive lattice. |
| | |
| 338 | Using phase conjugation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter wherein the light beam returns through the
medium at precisely the same angles, distances, and
intensities it was directed prior to the reflection.
| | (1)
Note. The medium causes the light to return to its
origin after reflection in precisely the same identical path it
took to reach the reflector. |
| | (2)
Note. See the January 1986 Scientific American article
on this subject matter. |
| | (3)
Note. This is often used to clear up poor images. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 300, | for phase conjugate light wave directional modulation (e.g., deflection
or scanning). |
|
| | |
| 339 | Using saturable or spatial filter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 337. Subject matter wherein the correction is accomplished by
allowing light transmission through the filter of an input light
beam only after a particular amount of energy is either applied (saturable
filter) or a specific portion of the light beam is passed (spatial
filter).
| | (1)
Note. A saturable filber is opaque to a light beam
input until one of the atoms of its material is excited to a second energy
level as a result of striking photons. Upon reaching this
second energy level, the filter becomes "saturated" and thus
transparent to the input beam due to the equalization between the
original and second energy levels causing no net absorption of additional
photons as they strike the filter. |
| | (2)
Note. A spatial filter generally consists of either (a) an
emulsion mask having a clean annular region in an otherwise opaque
region or (b) a pinhole, placed at a
focal plane in a laser expander; to remove unwanted radiation
generally referred to as amplified spontaneous emission. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclass 11 for absorption filter Q-Switch and subclass
14 for mechanical spatial filter Q-Switch. |
|
| | |
| 340 | Mode locked: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein the energy content of each state (i.e., mode) of
an oscillating system (e.g., laser) is
internally modulated in a particular field pattern and is one of
the possible resonant frequencies of the system to selectively give
rise to energy bursts of high peak power and short duration which
can be in the picosecond domain.
| | (1)
Note. This laser, referred to as a mode-locked
laser could also be in a continuous wave mode or a pulsed mode. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclass 18 for mode locking particular beam control without
a light input beam. |
|
| | |
| 341.1 | Optical fiber: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein amplification is produced within
a glass or plastic filament by the interaction of externally applied
energy and a unique property of the filament (e.g., lasing material).
| | (1)
Note. The details of an optical amplifier within
an optical waveguide or combination with additional external waveguide structure
are classified in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. Optical waveguides or fibers having the amplification
performed within the waveguide of the fiber are classified in this
subclass. |
| | (3)
Note. This class excludes patents claiming nominal
recitation of an amplifier or a frequency translator combined with optical
modulation within the fiber. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 332, | for optical waveguides which produce frequency translation. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclasses 1 through 3for temporal modulation performed within the optical
waveguides and subclasses 4-10 for directional modulation
performed within the optical waveguide. |
|
| | |
| 341.4 | Feedback: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 341.1. Subject matter including a path that returns some output
back to the input of a circuit, wherein systems using this
path, optical or electrical, to effect increased
spectral uniformity, reduce or increase gain, etc. |
| | |
| 342 | Particular active medium (e.g., crystal, plasma, fluid, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein a specified type of active medium, which
uniquely causes the amplification of the light input, is
used to change the number of atoms or atomic system in a set of
energy levels as a result of the absorption of light incident on
the material of the medium.
| | (1)
Note. The examples of crystal, plasma, and
fluid define the physical state of the active medium. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 343, | for a glass (amorphous) medium. |
| 344, | for a semiconductor medium. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclasses 39+ for a particular active medium which is not used
for amplification of a light beam input. |
|
| | |
| 343 | Glass (amorphous): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter wherein the solid active medium does not
have a definite crystalline structure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 342, | for crystal, plasma, fluid, etc., active medium. |
| 344, | for a semiconductor medium. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclass 40 for an amorphous (e.g., glass) active
medium which is not used to amplify a light beam input. |
|
| | |
| 344 | Semiconductor: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 342. Subject matter wherein the active medium is a solid or liquid
having a resistivity midway between that of an insulator and a metal.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 342, | for crystal, plasma, fluid, etc., active medium. |
| 343, | for a glass (amorphous) medium. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclasses 43.01+ for a semiconductor active medium which is not
used for amplification of a light beam input. |
|
| | |
| 345 | Particular pumping type (e.g., electrical, optical, nuclear, magnetic, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein a specified type of pumping is used
to change the number of atoms or atomic system in a set of energy
levels as a result of the absorption of light incident on the material.
| | (1)
Note. This pumping causes the atoms of a medium
to be raised from certain lower to certain higher energy levels, and
it may cause a population inversion between certain intermediate
levels in order to ultimately produce photons when the energy level
moves from higher to lower. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclasses 69+ for particular pumping type which is not used for
amplification of a light beam input. |
|
| | |
| 346 | Particular resonator cavity (e.g., scanning, confocal
or folded mirrors, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein the optical beam goes back and forth
within an optical cavity without any standing waves, similar
to an oscillating cavity, but resulting in the amplification
of the light input beam.
| | (1)
Note. This can be a mode-selecting high gain
optical structure in which the laser action takes place by the build-up
of electromagnetic field intensity upon multiple reflections. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclasses 92+ for laser particular resonant cavities which are
not used for amplification of a light beam input. |
|
| | |
| 347 | Multiple pass: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein the laser material does not have
to be continually pumped since the laser stays in a lasing state
for multiple traverses of light throughout the lasing medium to produce
amplified light beams that last longer than the period for the pumping
itself.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 350 for ring lasers with interfering different frequency
beams. |
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclass 94 for ring configuration folded resonant cavity. |
|
| | |
| 348 | Regenerative: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 347. Subject matter wherein the lasing medium is pumped more
than once to amplify a single input pulse.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclasses 69+ for particular pumping. |
|
| | |
| 349 | Beam combination or separation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 333. Subject matter wherein a light beam is either combined with
another light beam or many light beams are created from a single
light beam in order to produce the desired amplification. |
| | |
| 350 | HAVING SIGNIFICANT INFRARED OR ULTRAVIOLET PROPERTY: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including structure which is specifically
adapted, as by structure or composition, to function
as an optical element in the infrared (IR) or
ultraviolet (UV) portion of the spectrum, or
wherein an optical element is constructed or composed to extend
its operation into the infrared or ultraviolet from the visible
portion of the spectrum.
| | (1)
Note. IR (0.7 micrometers to 1000 micrometers
wavelength) according to Van Nostrand’s Encyclopedia, 7th
Edition
Meters: 7 X 10-7
m to .001 m
Centimeters: 7 X 10-5 cm
to .1 cm
Millimeters: 7 X 10-4 mm
to 1 mm
Micrometers: .7 micrometers to 1000
micrometers
Nanometers: 700 nm to 106 nm
Angstroms: 7000 A to 107 A
UV (100 Angstroms to 4000 Angstroms wavelength) according
to Van Nostrand’s Encyclopedia, 7th Edition
Meters: 10-8 m
to 4 X 10-7 m
Centimeters: 10-6 cm
to 4 X 10-5 cm
Millimeters: 10-5 mm
to 4 X 10-4 mm
Micrometers: .01 micrometers to .4
micrometers
Nanometers: 10 nm to 400 nm
Angstroms: 100 A to 4000 A
Metric Conversion Units:
Centimeters = 10-2
meters
Millimeters = 10-3
meters
Micrometers = 10-6
meters
Nanometers = 10-9
meters
Angstroms = 10-10 meters |
| | (2)
Note. Holographic systems and modulators of Class
359 and fibers or waveguides of Class 385 that operate in the IR or
UV portion of the spectrum are excluded from this and the indented
subclasses. |
| | (3)
Note. This subclass and those indented thereunder
are limited to elements which operate as optical elements in the
infrared and ultraviolet portion of the spectrum but a detector
to convert IR/UV energy to visible light is classified
in Class 250. |
| | (4)
Note. "Heat Filters" are considered infrared
filters. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 358, | for IR or UV fluid filter or fluid mirror. |
| 634, | for wavelength selective beam splitting or combining
surface (e.g., dichroic mirror). |
| 859, | for concave and convex mirrors in series for successive
reflections in mirrors. |
| 885+, | for absorption filters. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 89, | Ordnance,
subclass 41.06 for light reception traning mechanism. |
| 165, | Heat Exchange,
subclasses 279+ for temperature or pressure automatic control (Thermal-IR). |
| 219, | Electric Heating,
subclass 203 for combined vehicle or vehicle component windshield
or window heating device. |
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclass 216 for optical or pre-optical photocell system, subclass
226 for color filter or spectroscope optical or pre-photocell system, subclasses
330+ for infrared-to-visible imaging, subclass
333 image tube type imaging wherein the output screen is used to
visualize an intensified image or the IR image is converted to electrical
signals to control the display device, subclass 336.1 for
IR energy responsive electric signalling, subclasses 338.1+ for
infrared responsive invisible radiant energy responsive electric
signalling, subclass 351 for periodic scanning of an IR
beam, subclass 365 for UV light source, subclass
372 for UV light responsive means, subclass 493.1
for radiant energy generation and sources, subclass 504
for ultraviolet or infrared source radiation modifying member, and
subclasses 505.1+ for radiation controlling elements
exclusive of infrared, visible and ultraviolet optical elements. |
| 252, | Compositions,
subclass 587 for infrared light transmission modifying compositions, and
subclasses 588+ for ultraviolet transmission modifying compositions. |
| 283, | Printed Matter,
subclass 88 for IR filter with electromagnetic radiation having
revealable concealed information, fraud preventer or detector, use preventer
or detector, or identifier, subclass 89 for UV
filter with electromagnetic radiation having revealable concealed
information, fraud preventer or detector, use
preventer or detector, or identifier, and subclass
90 for polarized IR filter with electromagnetic radiation having
revealable concealed information, fraud preventer or detector, use
preventer or detector, or identifier. |
| 313, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
subclass 112 for polarizer or special ray transmission with
optical device or special ray transmission envelope. |
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 164+ for IR television. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 44+ for antiglare or shading spectacles and eyeglasses, and
subclasses 159.6 for through 159.65 light filtering
opthalmic lens or blanks. |
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclass 202 for projection light sources with cooling means. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 55 for an image projector having a heat filter. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 51 for IR and UV. |
| 374, | Thermal Measuring and Testing,
subclass 124 for thermally emitted radiation with scanning or
temperature distribution display. |
| 424, | Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body
Treating Compositions,
subclasses 59+ for a sun or radiation screening or suntanning
composition intended for topical application to a living body. |
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclass 160 for a coating with X-ray, Ultrasonic, or Infrared
properties, subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per
se, wherein the product is an optical element. |
| 607, | Surgery: Light, Thermal, and
Electrical Application,
subclass 1 for light, thermal, and electrically
applied surgery. |
|
| | |
| 351 | Having folded optical path: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter including an element which modifies the path
of incident light so as to cause the light to repeatedly traverse
the same or overlapping volumes of space.
| | (1)
Note. The system generally includes plural reflectors
to sequentially reverse the direction of the optical axis. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 489.08, | through 489.13, for birefringent element beam deflection or splitting
for polarization without modulation or external input. |
|
| | |
| 352 | Having polarizing element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter having an element which restricts the direction
of vibration of radiant energy.
| | (1)
Note. The restriction may have a time variation. |
| | (2)
Note. The polarized radiant energy may be visible
light accompanying the infrared or ultraviolet radiation. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 359, | for an IR/UV multilayer filter or multilayer
reflector. |
| 360, | for an IR/UV multilayer filter or multilayer
reflector having a metal layer. |
| 372+, | for plural optical axis microscope. |
| 419+, | for plural optical axis telescope. |
| 483, | for a visible light polarizer absent any infrared
or ultraviolet characteristic. |
| 486, | for light polarization without modulation or external
energy by grid or dipoles. |
| 487, | for polarization without modulation by reflection
or refraction. |
| 490+, | for polarization without modulation by dichroic
medium, which transmits light of one color and reflects
light of the complementary color with little light absorbed. |
| 494+, | for polarization without modulation by a birefringent
element, which divides a ray or beam of energy into two
polarized rays or beams separated by 90 degrees (known
as ordinary and extraordinary). |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 283, | Printed Matter,
subclass 88 for IR filter with electromagnetic radiation having
revealable concealed information, fraud preventer or detector, use preventer
or detector, or identifier. |
| 313, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
subclass 112 for polarizer or special ray transmission (e.g., filter) with
an electric discharge device. |
|
| | |
| 353 | Including alternative optical path or optical element (e.g., day-night, hi-low
magnification): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter which has an element allowing a variable
radiation path or which alternatively places an optical element
into or out of a fixed optical path, thereby producing
plural distinct radiation processing configurations.
| | (1)
Note. One or more configurations may be limited
to visible light. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 421, | for telescope compound lens selectable magnification. |
| 672+, | for lens with selective magnification by exchanging
or adding lens components. |
| 708, | for aspherical lens. |
| 744, | for afocal Galilean telescope lens. |
|
| | |
| 354 | Including continuously variable magnification or focal
length (zoom lens, adjustable lens): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter wherein the focal point or image magnification
of an imaging device or element is continuously or intermittantly
changed as desired.
| | (1)
Note. This includes various selected positions of
different optical elements to fit the user selected application. |
| | (2)
Note. This incudes IR/UV variable elements
adjacent to or part of the zoom lens. |
| | (3)
Note. This also includes FLIR (Forward Looking
Infrared systems). |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 421, | for telescope selectable magnification in a compound
lens for the visible portion of the spectrum. |
| 422, | for telescope variable magnification in a compound
lens for the visible portion of the spectrum. |
| 676+, | for zoom lens in the visible portion of the spectrum. |
| 744, | for an afocal lens (e.g., Galilean
Telescope). |
|
| | |
| 355 | Lens, lens system or component: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter including a refractive imaging element or
a serially arranged group thereof having a significant property
in the infrared or ultraviolet area of the electromagnetic spectrum.
| | (1)
Note. Compound lens systems are a plurality of lenses
or lens groups arranged in series coaxially along an optical axis, such
lenses or lens groups being so spaced along the axis that the second focal
plane of the entrant lens of the series lies at or near the first
focal plane of the next succeeding lens or lens group of the series
whereby the light entrant lens is capable of producing from light rays
passing therethrough from an object external to the plurality of
lenses an image of that object, which image is viewed or
relayed by the said succeeding lens or lens group. |
| | (2)
Note. Lens systems designate either a single transparent
mass of refractive material having opposed refracting surfaces or
a plurality of such masses arranged in series along an optical axis with
their opposed refracting surfaces disposed transversely of such
axis, the said opposed surfaces being so shaped and spaced
that the mass or plurality of masses are capable of producing from light
rays passing therethrough from an object external to the mass or
masses a single image of that object, which image is also
external to the mass or masses of material. |
| | (3)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either a single transparent mass of
refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or a grouped
plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical axis of
the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either in full
over-all contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations, the two refracting surfaces of the single
mass and the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of the plurality
of masses having at least a portion thereof axially air spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. The axial dimension of the air spacing between either
the opposed surfaces of the single mass or the axially extreme surfaces
of the grouped plurality of masses and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 356, | for an infrared lens. |
| 357, | for an infrared lens having four or more components. |
| 642+, | for lenses in the visible portion of the spectrum. |
| 722+, | for lenses which are selective in the visible spectrum
by transmitting or blocking certain wavelengths. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclass 160 for a coating having X-ray, ultraviolet, or infrared
properties. |
|
| | |
| 356 | Infrared lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 355. Subject matter having significant properties in the infrared
area of the electromagnetic spectrum. |
| | |
| 357 | Having four or more components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 356. Subject matter which includes four or more components which
have significant properties in the infrared area of the electromagnetic spectrum.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 754+, | for multiple component lenses, in general. |
|
| | |
| 358 | Fluid filter or fluid mirror: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter including filters or mirrors having a liquid
or gas which is specially adapted as by composition to transmit
or absorb infrared or ultraviolet radiation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 665+, | for fluid lenses. |
| 832, | for fluid filled prisms. |
| 845, | for fluid cooled mirrors. |
| 886, | for fluid absorption filters which operate in the
visible portion of the spectrum. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclass 226 for color filter or spectroscope optical or pre-photocell
system. |
| 252, | Compositions,
subclasses 582+ for light transmission modifying compositions and
subclass 588 for those compositions used for ultraviolet light transmission
modifying. |
|
| | |
| 359 | Multilayer filter or multilayer reflector: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 350. Subject matter having a substrate and one or more superimposed
coatings or laminae and which as a whole is designed to have significant
absorbent or redirective properties in the infrared or ultraviolet
portion of the spectrum.
| | (1)
Note. Interference filters wherein the multiple
reflected beams of various different frequencies will automatically interfere
with one another upon reflection are classified in this subclass
if significant IR/UV is specified. |
| | (2)
Note. Multi-layer absorption would not be
interference since waves are not produced which interfere with one
another. |
| | (3)
Note. Multi-layer absorbing elements are
classified in this subclass if significant IR/UV is specified. |
| | (4)
Note. Semiconductor elements are classified in this
subclass since they are not considered metals for subclass 360. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 580, | for light interference produced by coating or lamina. |
| 581, | for transmissive coating on interference lens. |
| 589, | for selective wavelength interference. |
| 590, | for selective wavelength interference with another
filter. |
| 839, | for mirrors with a transmissive property. |
| 884, | for mirrors with a selective absorption or transparent
overcoating. |
| 885+, | for absorptive filters. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 204, | Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy,
subclasses 192.26+ for optical or photoactive specified deposition
material glow discharge sputter deposited coating. |
|
| | |
| 360 | Having metal layer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 359. Subject matter wherein at least one coating or lamina or
the substrate is composed of a metal.
| | (1)
Note. Semiconductor elements are not considered
as metal and are included under subclass 359. |
| | (2)
Note. Only an elemental metal layer is classified
in this subclass. Metal alloys or compositions in a multilayer
structure are classified in subclass 359. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 722+, | for lenses with selective wavelength transmitting
or blocking. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclass 226 for color filter or spectroscope optical or pre-photocell
system. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclass 44 for sunglasses with antiglare or shading. |
| 607, | Surgery: Light, Thermal, and
Electrical Application,
subclass 95 for solar cabinets. |
|
| | |
| 362 | COMPOUND LENS SYSTEM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including a plurality of image formers arranged
for forming a series of real images along the optical axis, at
least one of the real images being formed between two of the image
formers.
| | (1)
Note. The terminal image former may be an "eyepiece" designed
to form a real image only in combination with the human eye. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 642+, | for lenses suitable for use in compound lens systems
of this subclass type. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 42, | Firearms,
subclass 119 for compound lens systems. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclasses 245+ for optical test instruments containing compound
lens systems. |
|
| | |
| 363 | With image recorder: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter including a device to record an image of
the object being directly viewed, the compound lens system
being primarily designed for direct viewing.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 372+, | for a microscope with plural optical axes, one
axis of which may be directed to an image recorder. |
| 403+, | for a periscope with plural optical axes, one
axis of which may be directed to an image recorder. |
| 419+, | for a telescope with plural optical axes, one
axis of which may be directed to an image recorder. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 396, | Photography,
subclass 432 for significant camera structure combined with a
diverse compound lens system. |
|
| | |
| 364 | With curved reflective imaging element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter including a curved reflector which contributes
to the formation of at least one of the real images.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 727+, | for lenses that employ both refraction and reflection
in forming an image (catadioptric lenses). |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 296.01 through 296.1for reflectors in illumination systems. |
|
| | |
| 365 | Two or more in a series: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 364. Subject matter including a plurality of curved reflectors
contributing to the formation of one or more of the real images.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 858+, | for image forming reflectors having plural curved
surfaces in series. |
|
| | |
| 367 | Right angle inspector: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter including a compound lens system with an
objective deflector to provide viewing at a right angle to the main
optical axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 434+, | for a relay system which may be used in a compound
lens system of the structure classified in this subclass (367). |
|
| | |
| 368 | Microscope: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter wherein the objective of the compound lens
system is designed to focus highly divergent light from an object
very close to the objective.
| | (1)
Note. Also illuminators, stages, slide carriers, and
transparent slides designed specifically for use with that type
of compound lens system are classified in subclasses indented under
this subclass (368). | |
| | |
| 369 | With viewed screen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter including structure for displaying a real
image on a viewed screen.
| | (1)
Note. The screen may be at an intermediate or terminal
image plane and may, for example, comprise a ground
glass screen, a front projection screen, a fiber optic
output face, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 400, | for a telescope with a viewed screen. |
| 443+, | for a viewing screen. |
| 505, | for an extended spacing structure for optical elements
including a screen. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 370.08+ for invisible radiant energy responsive signalling, including
imaging. |
| 313, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
subclasses 364+ for cathode-ray tubes and subclasses 523+ for
image intensifier tubes, etc. |
| 315, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices: Systems,
subclasses 1+ for cathode-ray tube circuits, including image
intensifiers. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 18, 47, 67, 72+, 74+, and
79+ for an image projection and viewing screen in combination. |
|
| | |
| 370 | Interference: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter wherein light from the object is combined
with light of different phase or diffraction characteristics either
from the object or bypassing the object.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 1+, | for interference microscopes having holographic
features or for making holograms. |
|
| | |
| 371 | Using polarized light: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 370. Subject matter wherein light with a particular polarization
characteristic is present.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 386, | for illuminators for microscopes other than interference
microscopes using polarized light. |
| 483.01, | through 494.01, for optics, systems, and elements
for polarization of light or using polarized light. |
|
| | |
| 372 | With plural optical axes: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter wherein light from an object may follow any
of a plurality of substantially different optical axes through the
microscope.
| | (1)
Note. The different optical axes may be partly colinear
and may be used either simultaneously or alternately. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 363, | for a compound lens system with an image recorder. |
| 403+, | for a periscope with plural optical axes. |
| 419+, | for a telescope with plural optical axes. |
|
| | |
| 373 | Side-by-side fields: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 372. Subject matter wherein at least two of the separate paths
provide different images which are adjacent in a common field of
view. |
| | |
| 374 | Plural oculars: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 372. Subject matter wherein at least two of the separate paths
terminate in separate eyepieces. |
| | |
| 375 | Binocular: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 374. Subject matter wherein at least two of the plural oculars
are separated at approximately the interocular distance to provide
simultaneous viewing by both eyes of one observer.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 404, | for a binocular periscope. |
| 407, | for a binocular telescope. |
| 480+, | for a binocular viewing device in general. |
|
| | |
| 376 | Stereoscopic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 375. Subject matter wherein at least two of the binocular eyepieces
provide stereoscopic viewing.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 462+, | for steroscopic viewing systems. |
|
| | |
| 378 | For viewing stereo pairs: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 377. Subject matter wherein separate objective channels view
different object fields, each field being filled by a separate
parallax object view for viewing.
| | (1)
Note. The devices of this subclass provide for two
separate fields. The stereoscopic property is related
to the objects being viewed taken from two slightly different directions
of a three-dimensional object. The views usually
comprise a pair of transparencies, each transparency being
a separate object view. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 466+, | for stereo-viewing devices. |
|
| | |
| 379 | Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter including means for varying the axial separation
of the optical elements, for example, for focusing
or varying magnification.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 399, Telescope, and titled "Separation
of optical elements axially adjustable" or including the
word "focusing" may include subject matter related
to subject matter in this subclass (379). |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 506, | for an adjustable extended spacing structure for
optical elements. |
|
| | |
| 380 | Variable magnification: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 379. Subject matter wherein varying the axial separation varies
the size of an in focus terminal image while the object distance
remains constant.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 407, Binocular, and titled "Spacing
of optical elements axially adjustable" may include subject matter
related to variable magnification. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 422, | for a telescope with variable magnification. |
| 432, | for variable magnification in nonmagnifying compound
lens systems. |
| 506, | for adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements. |
| 676+, | for a lens having its equivalent focal length variable
continuously between limits. |
|
| | |
| 382 | Entire microscope adjustable along optical axis: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter wherein the microscope translates along the
optical axis to vary the distance to an object plane.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 392, | for devices wherein the stage or slide carrier translates
along the optical axis. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 74, | Machine Element or Mechanism,
subclasses 25+ for a mechanism converting rotary motion to or
from reciprocating or oscillatory motion. |
|
| | |
| 383 | Focus adjustment: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 382. Subject matter wherein the adjustment along the optical
axis effects the focus of the compound optical system.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 410, | for binocular telesopes with adjustable focus. |
| 425+, | for telescopes with focusing. |
|
| | |
| 385 | Illuminator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter including (a) structure
for illuminating an object being viewed in combination with a microscope
or (b) object illuminating structure designed
specifically for use with a microscope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 798+, | for lenses with viewed object or viewed field illumination. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 257+ and 317+ for an illuminator with a modifier
or a light modifier. |
|
| | |
| 386 | Using polarized light: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter wherein the illuminating structure provides
polarized light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 371, | for an interference microscope using polarized light. |
| 483.01, | through 494.01, for systems and elements for the polarization of
light without modulation. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 362, | Illumination,
subclass 19 for an illuminator with a polarizer. |
|
| | |
| 388 | With optical switching means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter including means for changing optical elements
in the illuminating beam path to change the type of illumination.
| | (1)
Note. The optical elements may be movable in and
out of the illuminating beam path or the illuminating beam may be deflected
to pass through different optical elements. | |
| | |
| 390 | With illuminator support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 385. Subject matter including (a) means for
maintaining the illuminator in a fixed position or (b) means
for limiting the movement of the illuminator.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 382+ for an illuminator with a support. |
|
| | |
| 391 | Stage or slide carrier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter including (a) structure
for supporting an object to be viewed or tools to be placed in the
field of view in combination with a microscope or (b) structure
for supporting an object or tools designed specifically for use with
a microscope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 801, | and 804+, for lenses with a viewed object
support. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 248, | Supports, for supports generally. |
|
| | |
| 392 | Adjustable along optical axis: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter wherein the stage or slide carrier translates
along the optical axis to vary its distance from the microscope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 382+, | for devices wherein the microscope translates along
the optical axis. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 74, | Machine Element or Mechanism,
subclasses 25+ for a mechanism converting rotary motion to or
from reciprocating or oscillatory motion. |
| 108, | Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces,
subclasses 144.11+ for a vertically adjustable platform. |
|
| | |
| 393 | With plural transverse movements: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter wherein the stage or slide carrier is movable
in a plurality of directions perpendicular to the optical axis of
the microscope.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 74, | Machine Element or Mechanism,
subclass 471 for X-Y control devices. |
| 108, | Horizontally Supported Planar Surfaces,
subclasses 137+ for a horizontally adjustable platform. |
|
| | |
| 394 | With turntable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter wherein the stage or slide carrier is rotatable
about the optical axis or an axis parallel to the optical axis of
the microscope. |
| | |
| 395 | With temperature control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 391. Subject matter including means to vary or keep constant
the temperature at the location of the stage or slide carrier.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 396, | for devices including a transparent slide which
may include temperature control means. |
|
| | |
| 396 | Transparent slide: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 368. Subject matter including (a) a transparent mass, usually
a glass plate, for supporting an object to be viewed in
combination with a microscope or (b) a transparent
mass, usually a glass plate, designed specifically
for supporting an object to be viewed by a microscope.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclasses 244+ for sample or specimen holders. |
|
| | |
| 398 | Specimen cavity or chamber: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 396. Subject matter including a container for holding, isolating, or
limiting the flow of an object.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 246 for fluid sample containers. |
|
| | |
| 399 | Telescope: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter wherein the compound lens system is designed
for viewing distant objects. |
| | |
| 400 | With viewed screen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter including a semi-transparent or opaque
structure for displaying one of the series of real images.
| | (1)
Note. The screen may be at an interminate or terminal
image plane and may, for example, comprise a ground
glass screen, a front projection screen, a fiber optic
output face, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 369, | for a microscope with a viewed screen. |
| 443+, | for a viewing screen. |
| 505, | for an extended spacing structure for optical elements
including a screen. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclass 213 for circuits having image intensifier or nonvisible
to visible imaging vacuum tubes. |
| 313, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
subclass 524 for a telescope (or any optical system) combined
with an image intensifier. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 18 , 47, 67, 72+, 74+, and
79+ for an image projector and viewing screen in combination. |
|
| | |
| 401 | With image anti-rotation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein the telescope maintains an erect
terminal image as at least part of the telescope is turned to rotate
an intermediate image.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 554+, | for an image stabilization system including image
anti-rotation. |
|
| | |
| 402 | Periscope: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein the entrance optical axis and the
exit optical axis of the telescope are parallel and offset and perpendicular
to the main axis of the telescope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 401, | for a periscope with image anti-rotation. |
|
| | |
| 403 | With plural optical axes: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 402. Subject matter wherein light from an object may follow any
of a plurality of substantially different optical axes through the
periscope.
| | (1)
Note. The different optical axes may be partly colinear
and may be used either simultaneously or alternately. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 372+, | for a microscope with plural optical axes. |
| 419+, | for a telescope with plural optical axes. |
|
| | |
| 404 | Binocular: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 403. Subject matter wherein at least two of the substantially
different axes provide separate views to separate eyepieces for
binocular viewing.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 375+, | for a binocular microscope. |
| 407+, | for a binocular telescope. |
| 480+, | for a binocular viewing device in general that does
not use a compound lens system. |
|
| | |
| 405 | With mechanical adjustment: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 402. Subject matter wherein all or a portion of the periscope
relative to another structure is moved.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 429+, | for a telescope with line of sight adjustment. |
|
| | |
| 406 | Extensible structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 405. Subject matter wherein the extension or elevation of the
periscope is changed, usually by the use of telescoping
structures. |
| | |
| 407 | Binocular: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein at least two exit optical axes are
spaced at approximately the interocular distance to provide simultaneous
viewing by both eyes of one observer.
| | (1)
Note. This is the type of device used by fans at
a ball game to see distant players. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 375+, | for a binocular microscope. |
| 404, | for a binocular periscope. |
| 480+, | for a binocular viewing device in general that does
not use a compound lens system. |
|
| | |
| 408 | Foldable or collapsible: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 407. Subject matter wherein the binocular telescope is hinged
or provided with telescoping or bellows sections to provide a more
compact unit when not in use or prior to assembly.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 474, | for a collapsible stereoscope. |
| 817, | for a lens with a foldable or collapsible support. |
|
| | |
| 409 | Body supported or with handle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 407. Subject matter wherein the binocular telescopes are combined
with (a) an elongated structure for providing
a handhold or (b) a structure for engaging a portion
of the body or apparel for support. |
| | |
| 410 | With focusing means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 409. Subject matter wherein the supported binocular telescope
includes means for bringing an object at varying distances into
focus.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 412 with adjustable interocular distance and titled "Spacing
of optical elements axially adjustable" may include subject
matter related to focusing. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 379+, | for a microscope with the spacing of optical elements
axially adjustable. |
| 425+, | for a telescope with focusing or relatively sliding
barrels. |
| 506, | for an adjustable extended spacing structure for
optical elements. |
|
| | |
| 414 | Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 413. Subject matter wherein the axial separation of optical elements, usually
lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually
for focusing or varying magnification.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system, and titled "Separation
of elements axially adjustable", "Variable magnification" or
including the word "focusing" may include subject
matter related to subject matter in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 506, | for an adjustable extended spacing structure for
optical elements. |
|
| | |
| 416 | Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 415. Subject matter wherein the axial separation of optical elements, usually
lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually
for focusing or varying magnification.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system, and titled "Separation
of optical elements axially adjustable", "Variable
magnification" or including the word "focusing" may
include subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 506, | for an adjustable extended spacing structure for
optical elements. |
|
| | |
| 417 | Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 412. Subject matter wherein the axial separation of optical elements, usually
lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually
for focusing or varying magnification.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system, and titled "Separation
of optical elements axially adjustable", "Variable
magnification", or including the word "focusing" may
include subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 506, | for an adjustable extended spacing structure for
optical elements. |
|
| | |
| 418 | Spacing of optical elements axially adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 407. Subject matter wherein the axial separation of optical elements, usually
lenses, prisms, or mirrors, may be varied, usually
for focusing or varying magnification.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system, and titled "Separation
of optical elements axially adjustable", "Variable
magnification" or including the word "focusing" may
include subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 506, | for an adjustable extended spacing structure for
optical elements. |
|
| | |
| 419 | With plural optical axes: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein light from an object may follow any
of a plurality of substantially different paths through the telescope.
| | (1)
Note. The different optical axes may be partly colinear
and may be used either simultaneously or alternately. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 372, | for a microscope with plural optical axes. |
| 403, | for a periscope with plural optical axes. |
|
| | |
| 421 | Selectable magnification: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein the telescope includes means for
step variations of the image size while the object distance remains
constant.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 381, | for a microscope with an imaging element movable
in and out of the optical axis. |
|
| | |
| 422 | Variable magnification: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein the telescope continuously varies
the size of the image while the object distance remains constant.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 407, Binocular, and titled "Separation
of optical elements axially adjustable" may include subject
matter related to variable magnification. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 380, | for a microscope with variable magnification. |
| 432, | for a compound lens system with variable magnification. |
| 506, | for adjustable extended spacing structure for optical
elements. |
| 676+, | for a lens having its equivalent focal length variable
continously between limits. |
|
| | |
| 423 | With relay: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein the telescope includes at least one
lens system which forms a real image of a real image.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 402+, | for a periscope including a relay. |
| 422, | for a variable magnification telescope including
a relay. |
| 434, | for a compound lens system with a relay. |
|
| | |
| 424 | With reticle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 423. Subject matter wherein a cross-hair or emblem is
present at a real image plane of the telescope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 422, | for a variable magnification telescope including
a relay and a reticle. |
| 427, | for focusing or relatively sliding barrels with
a reticle. |
| 428, | for a telescope with a reticle. |
| 505, | for an extended spacing structure for optical elements
with a reticle. |
|
| | |
| 425 | Focusing or relatively sliding barrels: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein the telescope includes (a) a
device for forming an in focus image of an object of varying distances
or (b) tubes supporting optical elements movable
axially into and out of one another.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system, and titled "Separation
of optical elements axially adjustable" may include subject
matter related to subject matter in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 410, | for a binocular telescope that is body supported
or with a handle and includes focusing means. |
| 506, | for an adjustable extended spacing structure for
optical elements. |
|
| | |
| 426 | Internal focusing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 425. Subject matter wherein the entrance and exit lenses remain
a fixed distance apart while the telescope is focused. |
| | |
| 427 | With reticle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 425. Subject matter wherein a cross-hair or emblem is
present at a real image plane of the telescope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 422, | for a variable magnification telescope including
a relay and a reticle. |
| 424, | for a telescope with a relay and a reticle. |
| 428, | for a telescope with a reticle. |
| 505, | for an extended spacing structure for optical elements
with a reticle. |
|
| | |
| 428 | With reticle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein a cross-hair or emblem is
present at a real image plane of the telescope.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 422, | for a variable magnification telescope including
a relay and a reticle. |
| 424, | for a telescope with a relay and a reticle. |
| 427, | for a telescope with focusing or relatively sliding
barrels and with a reticle. |
| 505, | for an extended spacing structure for optical elements
with a reticle. |
|
| | |
| 429 | With line of sight adjustment: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein the telescope includes adjusting
the direction of view and maintaining the adjustment.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 401, | for a telescope with image anti-rotation. |
| 405, | for a periscope with mechanical adjustment. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 248, | Supports,
subclasses 127+ for stands in general. |
|
| | |
| 430 | Equatorial mount: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 429. Subject matter wherein the telescope includes structure
to establish an axis (polar axis) parallel to
the earth’s rotational axis about which the telescope viewing
axis rotates (right ascension) at a selected angle (declination) between
the polar axis and the viewing axis. |
| | |
| 431 | With prism or U-shaped optical path: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 399. Subject matter wherein the telescope includes two right
angle deflections in series to reverse the optical path.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 413, | for adjustable binoculars including a prism or a
U-shaped optical path. |
|
| | |
| 432 | Variable magnification: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter wherein the compound lens system continuously
varies the size of a terminal image while the object distance remains
constant.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 407, Binocular, and titled "Spacing
of optical elements axially adjustable" may include subject matter
related to variable magnification. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 380, | for variable magnification in microscopes. |
| 422, | for variable magnification in telescopes. |
|
| | |
| 433 | With tilted lens or tilted image plane: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter wherein the compound lens system includes (a) at
least one lens whose optical axis is oblique to the optical axis
of the system or (b) is designed to produce at
least one image plane tilted with respect to the optical axis of the
system. |
| | |
| 434 | With relay: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 362. Subject matter wherein the compound lens system includes
at least one lens system that forms a real image of a real image.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 423+, | for a telescope with a relay. |
|
| | |
| 435 | Repetitious lens structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 434. Subject matter wherein the compound lens system includes (a) a
plurality of identical relays in series or side by side or (b) at
least one relay comprised of identical elements or elements symmetrically
reversed about a center point. |
| | |
| 436 | SCALE OR INDICIA READING: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including optical structure for facilitating
the reading of a scale, with or without a pointer or indicator, having
spaced lines or other indicia thereon; or for facilitating reading
a vernier type indicator where lines from two different scales are
matched.
| | (1)
Note. The scale may be on a weighing instrument, slide
rule, compass or speed indicator, etc.; and
classification is here unless sufficient scale supporting structure
is recited to classify with the particular art such as Class 33, Geometrical Instruments; Class
73, Measuring and Testing; Class 177, Weighing
Scales; and Class 235, Registers. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 116, | Signals and Indicators,
subclasses 327+ for signal pointers and indicating arms. |
| 177, | Weighing Scales,
subclass 234 for self-positioning scales with magnified indication
of spring deformation. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 242.1 for thread counters and similar subject matter
where a relationship between the counter and the fabric is recited
such as a viewing aperture or support for the counter on the fabric
or a fabric support, subclasses 247+ for optical
reticles and crosshairs and subclasses 373 and 397 for distance
measuring devices which have a scale or optical grid displaced relative
to a remote fiducial mark. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 23+ for dial illuminators. |
|
| | |
| 437 | Polarizer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter including a polarizing element.
| | (1)
Note. A polarizing element causes incident light
polarization as defined in the class definition. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 483.01, | through 494.01, for specific polarizing elements in polarization
without modulation. |
|
| | |
| 438 | Prism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter including a prism which may reflect or refract
light for better viewing the scale or indicia.
| | (1)
Note. See subclass 831 for the definition of a prism. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 831+, | for specific prism elements. |
|
| | |
| 439 | Mirror: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter including a mirror to reflect light from
the scale or indicia to the viewer.
| | (1)
Note. See subclass 838 for the definition of a mirror. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 838+, | for mirrors, per se. |
|
| | |
| 440 | Lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 436. Subject matter including a lens.
| | (1)
Note. See subclass 642 for the definition of a lens. |
| | (2)
Note. The lens is usually employed to magnify the
image of the scale markings or indicia. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 806, | for optical reading devices including line markers. |
| 809+, | for lenses combined with diverse type art devices
in general. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 73, | Measuring and Testing,
subclass 327 for a reflector or magnifier used for sighting
in a liquid level or depth gauge. |
|
| | |
| 441 | Movable or adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 440. Subject matter including means for adjusting or moving the
lens with respect to the scale or indicia as for positioning or
focusing the lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
|
| | |
| 442 | Along scale or indicia: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 441. Subject matter including means to guide a lens along the
reading direction of a linear scale or indicia.
| | (1)
Note. The lens may be movable along a nonlinear (e.g., circular) scale
as well as a linear scale and the structure must be included which
constricts or guides the movement of the lens along the scale or indicia. |
| | (2)
Note. An actuator, per se, is
not classified in this subclass. | |
| | |
| 443 | PROJECTION SCREEN: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including a sheet or other extending surface
or area which is especially adapted to render an image of an object
which is projected thereon visible to an observer, usually
by diffusing the projected light.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass and those indented thereunder
in this class (359) include screens where the
size, shape, or refractive index of embedded particles
is claimed or screens with elements having geometric curves, with
relative refractive indices or parts with claimed patterns, with
wave plates, acoustical characteristics or other optical
criterion. Such criterion must be more than mere "light diffusing
particles" or a "light diffusing surface" to
classify a patent in Class 359 as opposed to Class 139 or Class
428. See Class 427, appropriate subclasses for methods
of making screens by coating. |
| | (2)
Note. The screen may be merely tracing paper or
a canvas as in indented subclass 447. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 350+, | for a viewing screen having infrared or ultraviolet
characteristics. |
| 900, | for miscellaneous methods of making screens not
classified in Class 427, Coating Processes, or
Class 156, Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical
Manufacture, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 139, | Textiles: Weaving,
subclasses 383+ for light diffusing woven screens. |
| 160, | Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or
Panel, especially
subclasses 19+ and 371+ for framed screens without optical
details other than merely "translucent" or something similar. |
| 248, | Supports, especially
subclasses 158+ for screen supports. |
| 264, | Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes,
subclasses 1.1+ for processes directed to forming optical articles
capable of producing an optical effect other than mere transparency
or planar reflection. |
| 312, | Supports: Cabinet Structure,
subclasses 21+ for screens supported in a cabinet. |
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclass 61 for a motion picture projector combined with a
screen. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 18 , 47, 67, 72+, 74+, and
79+ for cabinet which encloses projector and one side of
screen or structurally related projector and screen. |
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se, wherein the
product is an optical element. |
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, especially
subclasses 143+ for embedded light diffusing particles or for light
diffusing stock material in the form of a single or plural layer web
or stock material which may be useful for projection purposes. |
|
| | |
| 444 | With sound producer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter including a loudspeaker or other sound producing
means combined with the screen.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclass 36 for motion picture devices combined with screens
and sound producers. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 18 for an image projector in combination with a sound
producer. |
| 381, | Electrical Audio Signal Processing Systems and
Devices,
subclasses 150+ for electrical loudspeakers, per se. |
|
| | |
| 445 | Acoustical: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter wherein the screen is especially adapted
to transmit or damp sound waves.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 444, | for acoustical screens combined with means to produce
sound. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 181, | Acoustics,
subclasses 175+ for mufflers and sound filters. |
|
| | |
| 446 | Moving during projection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter including means to rotate or oscillate the
screen, usually for the purpose of improving the image
seen by viewers or for imparting a three dimensional effect.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 520+, | for vibrating, oscillating, or
rotating signal reflectors. |
|
| | |
| 447 | Tracing (e.g., camera
lucida, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter wherein the screen upon which an image is
formed is adapted to have an outline of the image traced or sketched
thereon.
| | (1)
Note. The instrument, commonly referred
to as a camera lucida, usually includes a prism or mirrors
and sometimes a lens to cause a virtual image of an object to appear
as if projected upon a plane surface so that an outline may be traced. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 369, | and 400, for a compound lens system combined
with a viewing screen. |
| 448, | for a lens combined with a viewing screen. |
| 449, | for a reflector combined with a viewing screen. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 44 and 45 for an image projector having a concentrated
source of light to project an image for the purpose of tracing it. |
|
| | |
| 448 | With lens (e.g., camera
obscura, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter including a lens combined with the screen, the
screen usually being positioned in the second principle focal plane
of the lens.
| | (1)
Note. The device, commonly known as a camera
obscura, usually has a darkened chamber with a lens at
the entrance thereof to permit light from external objects to enter
and to form an image of the objects on a screen in the chamber. |
| | (2)
Note. The combinations classified here are often
constructed to function normally only when the light rays approaching
the entrant lens from the object are substantially parallel, under
which conditions the image produced by the device is always greatly
reduced relative to the size of the object. The lens and
screen combinations classified in Class 353, Optics:
Image Projectors, differ from those classified here in
that they are constructed to operate normally only when the light
rays approaching the entrant lens from the object are of the widely diverging
type, that is, when the object is near the first
principal focal plane of the entrant lens, under which
conditions the image produced by the device is enlarged relative
to the size of the object, a condition that usually necessitates
the use of intense artificial object illumination to provide an
adequately illuminated image. Moreover, the lens
and screen combinations of Class 353, Optics: Image
Projectors, always have their object and screen in the
conjugate focal planes of the projection lens employed with the
screen spaced more distant from the lens than the object, while
the lens and screen combinations of this subclass 448 have their
object and screen substantially at infinity and at the principal
focal plane of the lens respectively. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 369, | and 400, for a compound lens system combined
with a viewing screen. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 18 , 47, 67, 72+, 74+, and
79+ for an image projector having a light source or means
to concentrate solar light and including a lens and screen combination.
See (2) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 449 | With reflector or additional screen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter including another screen or a reflector which
usually is between the first screen and a projector.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 447, | for camera lucidas which include reflectors. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 67 , 73, 77, and 78 for
an image projector having a screen and a reflector. |
|
| | |
| 450 | Border, mask, shade, or curtain: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter including means connected to the screen to
shield or shade the screen or to modify the contrast between the
screen and the surrounding area.
| | (1)
Note. For the purpose of this subclass, drapes, hoods, and
covers are considered to be curtains. | |
| | |
| 451 | Curved: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter wherein the surface of the screen is articulated
rather than flat.
| | (1)
Note. In this subclass the overall shape or surface
of the screen is curved but subclasses 455 and 459 have curved individual
elements but the overall surface of the screen is generally flat. | |
| | |
| 452 | Embedded particles: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter including a mass or sheet of material (e.g., resin, etc.) with
particles partially or fully embedded therein to affect the light
transmission or reflection characteristics of the screen, the
particles having characteristics such as a particular geometric
shape, size, or refractive index.
| | (1)
Note. The screens in Class 428, Stock Material
or Miscellaneous Articles, subclasses 143+ may
include particles claimed as light diffusing or as causing translucency.
However, if the particles are claimed as having certain
refractive index, size or shape, or an index
or size relative to the remainder of the screen material, the
patent is classified here in subclass 452. Further, if
a geometric configuration is formed by the particles in the screen
the patent is also classified here in subclass 452. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se, wherein the
product is an optical element. |
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
subclasses 143+ for a stock material product containing embedded
particles which diffuse light, and see (1) Note
above. |
|
| | |
| 455 | Lenticular: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 454. Subject matter wherein at least some of the plurality of
refracting elements have spherical or cylindrical curvature.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 542, | for signal reflectors with plural refracting elements
formed as a unitary mass. |
| 619+, | for surfaces composed of lenticular elements. |
|
| | |
| 457 | With Fresnel lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 456. Subject matter wherein the lenticulated rear projection
screen includes a Fresnel lens or a lens resembling a plano-convex
or plano-concave lens that is cut into narrow rings and
flattened out.
| | (1)
Note. See subclass 742 for the definition of Fresnel
type lens. | |
| | |
| 458 | Stereoscopic imaging or three dimensional imaging: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 455. Subject matter wherein a lenticulated refractive screen
is placed between a picture and a viewer eye to provide an illusion
of relief or an illusory three dimension picture of a single perspective.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 462+, | for stereoscopic device that may include a nominal
recitation of a projection screen. |
| 478, | for relief illusion. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclasses 57+ for stereoscopic camera or projectors and subclasses
85+ for special effects, particularly subclass
86 for devices creating an illusion of three dimensional viewing
without employing separate left and right images. |
|
| | |
| 459 | Unitary sheet comprising plural reflecting areas: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter wherein a plurality of discrete reflecting
elements are part of a unitary plate or sheet, the reflecting
elements redirecting the impinging light in different directions.
| | (1)
Note. The discrete elements are usually angularly
related or curved. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 530, | for a unitary sheet comprising a plurality of cube
corner or triple reflectors. |
| 546, | for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary
mass. |
| 619+, | for surfaces composed of lenticular elements. |
|
| | |
| 461 | Roll up screen: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 443. Subject matter wherein the screen is flexible and can be
wound around a roller for easy storage or for portability. |
| | |
| 462 | STEREOSCOPIC: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter comprising (1) a separate optical
system for each eye of one person, which are looking at
a common object, for producing separate visual records
containing information from the two different points of view relative
to that object, or (2) the stereoscopic
record itself, or (3) the devices for
viewing such records.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass takes optical systems of stereo
projectors and cameras which are not sufficient to constitute a complete
projector or camera. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 478, | for devices giving an illusion of relief but where
information is obtained only from a single point of view. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 33, | Geometrical Instruments,
subclass 1 for measuring stereoscopes and subclass 20.4
for plotting stereoscopes combined with a stylus. |
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclass 1 for exhibitors in general, and subclasses
361+ for nonstereo transparent film viewers. |
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 42+ for stereoscopic television systems. |
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclasses 57+ for stereoscopic motion picture cameras. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 7+ for attachments which convert a conventional projector
to a stereoscopic image projector. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclasses 12+ for base line type range or height finders which
include stereoscopic viewers and subclass 390 for mensuration or
configuration comparison devices which may involve stereo-viewers. |
| 378, | X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices,
subclasses 41+ for a stereoscopic X-ray or gamma ray
system. |
| 396, | Photography,
subclasses 324+ for stereoscopic camera. |
|
| | |
| 463 | Having record with lenticular surface: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter comprising a record with a plurality of reflecting
or transmitting elements, each having a curved or figured
surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 455+, | for lenticular projection screens. |
| 619+, | for surfaces composed of lenticular elements. |
| 642+, | for lenses generally. |
| 727, | for lenses having concave and/or convex
reflecting surfaces with coatings. |
|
| | |
| 464 | With right and left channel discriminator (e.g., polarized
or colored light): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter associated with stereo systems wherein by
appropriate viewing devices (e.g., colored
or polarizing spectacles), light rays representing
the right and left stereoscopic channels and having different optical
properties (e.g., color, direction
of polarization), in accordance with the channel
they represent, will affect only the eye appropriate to
a given channel.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes for example, (1) apparatus
for forming superimposed images from light rays having different
optical properties, (2) the record containing
right and left stereo images characterized by having different optical
properties, or (3) the viewing devices
for discriminating between the light rays from the right and left
images. | |
| | |
| 465 | Using polarized light: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 464. Subject matter wherein the particles of the light vibrate
perpendicular to the direction of travel and these vibrations are
either in straight lines, circles, or ellipses.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 483.01, | through 494.01, for optics, systems, and elements
for polarization of light or using polarized light. |
|
| | |
| 466 | Stereo-viewers: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 462. Subject matter comprising either (1) viewing devices
which are used to aid the observer in fusing adjacently mounted
right and left stereoscopic pictures or (2) the
adjacently mounted right and left stereoscopic pictures themselves.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 804+, | for nonstereo viewers with a significant lens system. |
|
| | |
| 467 | View changers: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter including means to facilitate changing from
one stereoscopic slide or picture to another.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclasses 446+ for changeable exhibitors in general. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 92 and 103+ for a slide changer for an image
projector. |
|
| | |
| 469 | Using film-strips: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 468. Subject matter wherein a carrier is formed as a tape or
strip with individual elements of a motion picture sequence uniformly
spaced along the strip.
| | (1)
Note. Film strips may include moving film, film-roll
band, ribbon of film, film tape, or film
spools. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclass 37 for strip type films with a sound record, subclass
56 for methods of working or making a film strip, subclass
59 for stereoscopic apparatus involving plural film strips, subclasses
166+ for drive mechanisms for film strips, and
subclasses 232+ for motion picture carriers. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 120 for picture carriers for still projectors. |
|
| | |
| 470 | Compensates for camera position (e.g., plotting
or mapping type): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter wherein compensation is made for the orientation
or position of the recording device or devices which produced the
stereo pictures.
| | (1)
Note. This subject matter generally involves stereoscopes
for plotting, mapping, or measuring where the
raw data must be adjusted to compensate for such things as parallax, different
image size, skew, or tilt, etc., caused
by a particular camera orientation. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 33, | Geometrical Instruments,
subclass 1 for similar subject matter combined with measuring
means and subclass 20.4 for similar subject matter combined
with scribing means. |
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 200+ for similar devices employing photocells. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 6 for an image projector for stereoscopic mapping
or for rectifying an aerial photograph. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 2 for contour plotting devices which may involve
stereo-viewers. |
|
| | |
| 474 | Collapsible: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter wherein the stereoscope after use can be
folded, collapsed, or dismantled to form a more
compact package or wherein the stereoscope, prior to use, is
folded, collapsed, or dismantled.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 817, | for lenses with foldable or collapsible supports. |
|
| | |
| 475 | Having Illumination: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter including means to illuminate or improve
the illumination of the stereo picture.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 798+, | for illuminating a viewer including a significant
lens system. |
|
| | |
| 477 | Supporting, mounting, enclosing, or
light shielding structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 466. Subject matter comprising supporting, mounting, enclosing
or light shielding structure for stereo viewer or its components.
| | (1)
Note. Examples of this subclass are stereoscopic
hoods, cases or handles. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 407+, | for compound lens binocular with supports or handles. |
| 811+, | for lenses with supports. |
|
| | |
| 478 | RELIEF ILLUSION: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter for giving a depth or relief effect comprising
a visual record which contains information of the object viewed
obtained from only one point of view.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 462+, | for stereoscopic devices where the visual record
contains information obtained from two different points of view. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 348, | Television,
subclass 44 for pseudo stereoscopic television. |
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclass 86 for a motion picture device for depth illusion. |
|
| | |
| 480 | BINOCULAR DEVICES: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter comprising one separate optical element, aperture
or tube for each eye of the user or comprising a single optical
element used alternately by each eye.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 404, | for telescopic binocular having plural optical axes. |
| 407+, | for binocular type compound lens system. |
| 466+, | for stereoscopic viewing devices. |
| 618+, | for systems including a single optical channel which
merges to or from a plural optical channel, the plural channel
lacking the binocular use. |
|
| | |
| 481 | Binocular loupe type: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 480. Subject matter including a support shaped to position one
or more lenses before each eye so that the lenses move with the
head of the user.
| | (1)
Note. The support may be adapted to be attached
directly to either the head, e.g., a
head band, or spectacle frames. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 407+, | for binocular type compound lens systems. |
| 815, | for such structure which is body or apparel carried. |
| 816, | for monocular loupes. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 2, | Apparel,
subclasses 426+ for goggles. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 41+ for spectacles and eyeglasses. See Lines
With Other Classes and Within This Class, Lenses, in
the 351 Class Definition for the distinction between the vision
correcting structure of Class 351 and the magnifying structure of
Class 359. |
|
| | |
| 483.01 | POLARIZATION WITHOUT MODULATION: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a polarization of an incident light
beam is produced or modified in a time invariant fashion as a result
of passing through an optical device.
| | (1)
Note. Where both a polarizing device and a composition
are claimed, the patent is classified here and cross-referenced
to class 252, subclass 585. |
| | (2)
Note. Where a method of making the polarizing device
is claimed as well as the polarizing device, the patent
is classified here and cross-referenced to any other class
providing for the method. |
| | (3)
Note. The nominal recitation of a polarizing area
in the form of a design, image, etc., or
specifics of a polarization element (e.g., polarization
light characteristics) is sufficient to include this subject matter
in these subclasses. However, the nominal recitation
of a polarization element in an optical system is not sufficient
to include the subject matter in these subclasses and should be
classified elsewhere where such combination meets the class requirements. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 204.3, | for polarized light to be deflected using moving
element. |
| 246, | through 258, for polarization with modulation by eletro-optic
devices with applied time variant electric signal. |
| 281, | through 289, for polarization with modulation by magneto-optic
devices with applied time variant magnetic signal. |
| 301, | for light wave directional control of polarized
light. |
| 352, | for a polarizing element having significant infrared
or ultraviolet properties. |
| 371, | and 386, for compound lens systems combined
with polarizers. |
| 437, | for polarizers used in a scale or indicia reading. |
| 465, | for polarizers used in stereoscopic systems. |
| 484.01, | for polarization using an applied external time-invariant
electric, magnetic, or electromagnetic signal. |
| 484.02, | through 484.1, for polarization requires magneto rotation. |
| 485.01, | through 485.07, for polarization by reflection or refraction. |
| 486.01, | through 486.03, for polarization direction or magnitude varied over surface
of the medium. |
| 487.01, | through 487.06, for polarization by dichroism. |
| 489.01, | through 489.2, for polarization by birefringence. |
| 601, | through 614, for optical structure in general used to reduce
unwanted light, not polarizing structure for reducing antiglare. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, particularly
subclasses 434 and 548 for illuminated signs utilizing polarizers. |
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclasses 30.1 and 32.1 for processes for forming polarizing
glass material. |
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 225 and 559.09 for a light polarizer and a
photocell and subclass 341.3 for invisible radiation energy
response methods including polarization means. |
| 252, | Compositions,
subclass 585 for chemical compositions which produce polarized
light. |
| 264, | Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating: Processes,
subclass 1.31 for light polarizing articles. |
| 313, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
subclass 112 for electric lamps and electronic tubes combined
with a polarizer. |
| 343, | Communications: Radio Wave Antennas,
subclass 756 for antennas with a polarization converter and
subclasses 909+ for radio wave polarizations, per se. |
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 57 and 58 for stereoscopic displays with polarization. |
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclass 9 for projectors with liquid crystal cell which produces
S and P polarized light, subclass 80 for color polarizers
in a liquid crystal cell, subclass 87 for variable polarizers
in a liquid crystal cell, subclasses 96-103 for
liquid crystal cell structure with polarizing element, and subclass
194 for liquid crystal polarizer. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 49 , 215, and 232 for light-polarizing devices
used in eye examining vision testing and correcting means. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 8 and 20 for polarizers used with image projectors. |
| 355, | Photocopying,
subclass 71 for photocopy system having illumination system
with a polarizer. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclasses 30 and 31 for gem or crystal examining using polarized
light; subclass 33 for material strain analysis with polarized
light, subclasses 322 and 327 for spectrometers which utilize
polarized light, subclasses 364-370 for polarized
light examination devices generally, and subclasses 453, 487
and 491 for interferometers with polarizing elements. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclass 19 for illumination systems with a polarizing element. |
| 365, | Static Information Storage and Retrieval,
subclasses 121 and 122 for polarization techniques used in the storage
and retrieval of information. |
| 369, | Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval,
subclasses 13.29 through 13.31for employing polarized light in a storage or
retrieval device and subclasses 110.01-110.04
and 112. 16-112.21 for polarizing
optical elements in an optical pick-up device. |
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclass 106 for a polarizer in a coherent light generator (i.e., laser). |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclass 11 for polarization devices without modulation and
including an optical waveguide. |
| 398, | Optical Communications,
subclass 65 for polarization in multiplexing optical communication
devices, subclass 152 for transmitter/receiver
systems that include polarization. |
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 163.1 through 163.4for coating processes, per se, where
the product is an optical element. |
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
subclass 1.31 for liquid-crystal layers including polarizer. |
| 472, | Amusement Devices,
subclasses 57 through 84for a theatrical stage device which may use a polarizer. |
| 501, | Compositions: Ceramic,
subclasses 30 and 56 for polarizers with specified glass compositions. |
| 977, | Nanotechnology,
subclass 834 for nanomaterials having optical properties that
may include polarization. |
|
| | |
| 484.01 | Polarization using a time invariant electric, magnetic, or
electromagnetic field (e.g., electro-optical, magneto-optical): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 483.01. Subject matter wherein an electric, magnetic, or
electromagnetic field, which is unchanging in time, is
applied to the optical device to produce or alter the polarization.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 368 for polarimeters which include electro-optical
light rotation. |
| 365, | Static Information Storage and Retrieval,
subclasses 121 and 122 for information masking using magneto-optical
polarization. |
| 369, | Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval,
subclasses 13.01 through 13.55for magneto-optical storage systems. |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclass 11 for polarization devices without modulation and
including an optical waveguide. |
|
| | |
| 484.02 | Faraday effect: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 484.01. Subject matter wherein the applied field is a magneto-optic
field in which the magneto-optic field interacts with the
optical device to produce a rotation in the plane of polarization (i.e., Faraday
effect).
| | (1)
Note. Included in this subclass are Faraday rotation
devices without modulation. Faraday rotation devices
that include modulation would be appropriate for subclasses 280-284. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 365, | Static Information Storage and Retrieval,
subclass 122 for information masking using magneto-optical polarization. |
| 369, | Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval,
subclasses 13.01 through 13.55for magneto-optical storage systems. |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclass 11 for polarization devices without modulation and
including an optical waveguide. |
|
| | |
| 484.03 | Isolator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 484.02. Subject matter wherein a Faraday effect element is used
in an optical isolator.
| | (1)
Note. An optical isolator is an optical device which
allows the transmission of light in only one direction. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclass 703 for optical isolator in a coherent light generator (i.e., laser). |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclass 11 for polarization devices without modulation and
including an optical waveguide. |
|
| | |
| 484.04 | With reflector: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 484.03. Subject matter wherein the optical isolator includes at
least one reflective element (e.g., mirror, retroreflector, etc). |
| | |
| 484.05 | Circulator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 484.02. Subject matter wherein a Faraday effect element is used
in an optical circulator.
| | (1)
Note. An optical circulator is an at least three-port
device that allows light to travel in only one direction (e.g., lights travels
from port 1 to port 2, then from port 2 to port 3). |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclass 11 for polarization devices without modulation and
including an optical waveguide. |
| 398, | Optical Communications,
subclass 65 for polarization in multiplexing optical communication
devices, subclass 152 for transmitter/receiver
systems that include polarization, subclass 205 for heterodyne
receiver including polarization. |
|
| | |
| 484.06 | Optical switch: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 484.02. Subject matter wherein a Faraday effect element is used
in an optical switch.
| | (1)
Note. An optical switch is an optical device which
enables light to be selectively switched from one port to another. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclasses 16 through 23for optical switches utilizing an optical waveguide. |
| 398, | Optical Communications,
subclasses 45 through 57for optical switching in multiplexing optical communication devices. |
|
| | |
| 484.07 | Interleaver: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 484.02. Subject matter wherein a Faraday effect element is used
in an optical interleaver.
| | (1)
Note. An optical interleaver is an at least 3-port
device that is used to combine two sets of wavelength-division
multiplexing (WDM) channels (e.g., odd
and even channels) into a composite signal stream in an
interleaving way. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclass 11 for polarization devices without modulation and
including an optical waveguide. |
| 398, | Optical Communications,
subclass 65 for polarization in multiplexing optical communication
devices, subclass 152 for transmitter/receiver
systems that include polarization, subclass 205 for heterodyne
receiver including polarization. |
|
| | |
| 484.08 | Attenuator: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 484.02. Subject matter wherein a Faraday effect element is used
in an optical attenuator.
| | (1)
Note. An optical attenuator is an optical device
that reduces the amplitude or power of a signal. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 337.1, | through 337.13, for spectral gain flattening or equalization. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 370 for measuring/testing of polarized light
having light attenuation. |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclass 140 for optical attenuators including an optical waveguide. |
|
| | |
| 484.09 | Interference or comb filter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 484.02. Subject matter wherein a Faraday effect element is used
in an interference or comb filter.
| | (1)
Note. An interference or comb filter is an optical
filter that selectively reflects or transmits light in a narrow
band of wavelengths. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 489.19, | for frequency filters used for polarization by birefringence. |
| 589, | and 590, for general interference filters. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 20 for polarizers used with image projectors. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclasses 491 through 495for interferometers having polarization. |
|
| | |
| 484.1 | With particular Faraday effect material: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 484.02. Subject matter wherein details of materials that are involved
in the generation of the Faraday effect are recited.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 117, | Single-Crystal, Oriented-Crystal, and Epitaxy
Growth Processes; Non-Coating Apparatus Therefor,
subclass 54 for the process of growing magnetic compositions. |
| 252, | Compositions,
subclass 585 for chemical compositions which produce polarized
light and subclasses 62.51+ for the magnet material
composition. |
| 335, | Electricity: Magnetically Operated Switches, Magnets, and
Electromagnets,
subclasses 209 through 306for the magnet structure. |
|
| | |
| 485.01 | Polarization by reflection or refraction: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 483.01. Subject matter wherein a light beam is polarized as a result
of either (1) by striking a surface and returning
into the originating medium of an optical element or (2) by
redirecting as it passes through media of differing indices of refraction
of the optical element.
| | (1)
Note. The reflection or refraction phenomena must
follow Snell’s Law to be appropriate for this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclass 9 for projectors with liquid crystal cell which produces
S and P polarized light, subclasses 96-103 for
liquid crystal cell structure with polarizing element and subclass
194 for liquid crystal polarizer. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 20 for polarizers used with image projectors. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclass 19 for illumination systems with a polarizing element. |
|
| | |
| 485.02 | Brewster angle polarizer (reflective or transmissive): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 485.01. Subject matter wherein the polarizing optical element reflects
or transmits light at Brewster’s angle.
| | (1)
Note. Since the reflection coefficient for light
which has an electric field parallel to the plane of incidence goes
to zero at some incidence angle between 0 and 90, the reflected
light at that angle (Brewster’s angle) is
linearly polarized with its electric field vectors perpendicular
to the plane of incidence and parallel to the plane of the surface
from which it is reflecting. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 372, | Coherent Light Generators,
subclass 106 for a polarizer in a coherent light generator (i.e., laser). |
|
| | |
| 485.03 | Multilayer polarizer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 485.01. Subject matter wherein the polarizing optical element includes
a plurality of layers, at least one of which is reflective
or refractive.
| | (1)
Note. Multilayer optical elements which operate using
optical interference are appropriate for this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. Multilayer optical elements that include one
or more birefringent layers should be classified in 489.19
and are not appropriate for this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 371, | for interference microscopes which may utilize polarized
light. |
| 580, | through 590, for general optical inference elements. |
|
| | |
| 485.05 | Wire grid polarizer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 485.01. Subject matter wherein the polarizing optical element includes
metallic conductors in the form of a reflective grid (i.e., each
grid opening forms a half wavelength of the applied light) to
produce a polarization of the applied light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 352, | for a polarizing element having significant infrared
or ultraviolet properties. |
| 569, | through 576, for diffractive optical elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 216, | Etching a substrate: Processes,
subclass 24 for general etching processes. |
|
| | |
| 485.06 | Prism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 485.01. Subject matter wherein the polarizing optical element has
at least two plane surfaces inclined relative to each other, from
which light is reflected or through which light is refracted.
| | (1)
Note. A prism may be employed for refracting or reflecting
light. Prism reflections are considered to be internal reflections; that
is, the light is inside the prism body both before and
immediately after the reflection. |
| | (2)
Note. The prismatic element may include a plurality
or an array of prisms (e.g., crossed
prisms, x-prisms or kernel prisms). |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 489.09, | and 489.1, for prisms used for
polarization by birefringence. |
| 629, | through 638, for general beam splitting elements. |
| 831, | through 837, for prisms, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclasses 8 through 9for projectors with liquid crystal cell which produces
S and P polarized light. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 20 for polarizers used with image projectors. |
|
| | |
| 485.07 | Mirror: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 485.01. Subject matter wherein the reflective element is a mirror.
| | (1)
Note. The reflective element may include a plurality
or an array of mirrors. | |
| | |
| 486.01 | Polarization (direction or magnitude) variation
over surface of the medium: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 483.01. Subject matter comprising a surface which transmits or reflects
light and whose ability to polarize light is not uniform across the
surface.
| | (1)
Note. This variation in polarizing ability may be
continuous or discontinuous and may form any type of pattern. For
example, the different areas of a surface may form an image
or design as in a vectograph. | |
| | |
| 486.02 | Linear variation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 486.01. Subject matter wherein the polarization varies along a single
direction or two orthogonal directions (e.g., matrix
or checkerboard).
A typical example of the subject matter. 
A typical example of the subject matter. 
A typical example of the subject matter. |
| | |
| 487.01 | Polarization by dichroism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 483.01. Subject matter including an optical element made of dichroic
materials which have different absorption for different incident polarization
planes of light.
| | (1)
Note. Included here are elements where the medium
comprises a lamination or a coating on a supporting structure and where
the supporting structure is significant or the means to form the
lamination or coating is significant. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 352, | for a polarizing element having significant infrared
or ultraviolet properties. |
| 580, | for general dichroic elements without polarization
properties. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 156, | Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
subclasses 99 through 108for processes of adhesively bonding laminae. |
| 252, | Compositions,
subclass 585 for chemical compositions which produce polarized
light. |
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 163.1 through 163.4for coating processes, per se, where
the product is an optical element. |
|
| | |
| 487.02 | With stain or dye: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 487.01. Subject matter wherein the polarizing optical element is
made of dichroic coloring agent, such as a dye or stain (e.g., Polaroid
H or K sheets or dichroic iodine-based films).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
subclass 1.31 for liquid crystal layers including polarizer. |
|
| | |
| 487.03 | Wire grid polarizer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 487.01. Subject matter wherein the polarizing optical element includes
metallic conductors in the form of an absorptive grid (i.e., each
grid opening forms a half wavelength of the applied light) to
produce polarization of the applied light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 569, | through 576, for diffractive optical elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 216, | Etching a substrate: Processes,
subclass 24 for general etching processes |
|
| | |
| 487.04 | Wavelength-selective beamsplitter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 487.01. Subject matter wherein the polarizing dichroic optical element
is used to selectively separate or split the light beam into components
of different wavelengths.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 634, | for wavelength-selective, dichroic reflectors. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclasses 8 through 9for projectors with liquid crystal cell which produces
S and P polarized light. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 20 for polarizers used with image projectors. |
|
| | |
| 487.05 | Having plural elements: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 487.01. Subject matter wherein the polarizing optical device includes
a plurality of dichroic elements.
| | (1)
Note. The plurality of dichroic elements may include
a plurality of layers, films, coatings or optical
devices. | |
| | |
| 487.06 | Oriented particles: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 487.01. Subject matter wherein the polarization of the applied
light is dependent upon the spatial positioning of microscopic particles embedded
in the dichroic medium of the polarizing optical element.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 487.01, | for polarization caused by the molecular orientation
of the matrix material or of a reaction product. |
| 487.02, | for stain or dye molecules acting as oriented particles. |
|
| | |
| 489.01 | Polarization by birefringence: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 483.01. Subject matter wherein the polarizing optical element includes
crystalline materials having two distinct indices of refraction
associated with different crystallographic directions, i.e. birefringent
materials.
| | (1)
Note. A birefringent element has the property of
dividing a ray or beam of energy into two polarized rays or beams (known
as the ordinary and extraordinary rays), the directions
of polarization being at right angles to each other. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 489.09, | for a birefringent element in the form of a Nicol
prism where the unwanted ray is deflected. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclasses 30.1 and 32.1 for processes for forming polarizing
glass material. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 365 for measuring/testing of polarized light
having a birefringent element. |
| 501, | Compositions: ceramic,
subclasses 30 and 56 for polarizers with specified glass compositions. |
|
| | |
| 489.02 | With compensation techniques: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.01. Subject matter wherein the birefringent element corrects
for unwanted effects.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclasses 117 through 121for liquid crystal cell including compensation. |
|
| | |
| 489.03 | Intrinsic birefringence or photoelastic (stress) effect: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.02. Subject matter wherein the unwanted effect is intrinsic
birefringence or photoelastic (stress) effect.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclass 120 for liquid crystal cell including compensation
for negative intrinsic birefringence (i.e., negative
refractive index anisotropy). |
|
| | |
| 489.05 | Path length: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.02. Subject matter wherein the unwanted effect is changes in
optical or physical path length.
| | (1)
Note. Included in this subclass are optical delay
lines. | |
| | |
| 489.06 | Form birefringent element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.01. Subject matter wherein the optical element exhibits different
refractive indices as a result of an anisotropic physical structure
on a scale much larger than molecular but much smaller than the
wavelength of light.
| | (1)
Note. Examples of such elements may include polarizing
dielectric diffraction gratings or polarizing lattice grids. |
| | (2)
Note. Form birefringence is also known as structural
birefringence or structure-induced birefringence. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 566, | through 576, for diffractive optical elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 369, | Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval,
subclasses 112.03 through 112.15for optical pick-up devices having a diffractive
element. |
|
| | |
| 489.07 | Waveplate or retarder: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.01. Subject matter wherein the birefringent element is used
to alter the polarization state of a light wave traveling through
it by shifting the phase between the two perpendicular polarization
components of the incident light beam, i.e., birefringent
waveplate or retarder.
| | (1)
Note. Included in this subclass are waveplates or
retarders that are EXPLICITLY birefringent, i.e. the waveplate
or retarder is birefringent, anisotropic, uniaxial, biaxial
or double (doubly) refractive; the waveplate
or retarder is made from a birefringent crystalline material such
as quartz, calcite, tourmaline, rutile, sodium
nitrate, magnesium fluoride, sapphire, etc.; or the
waveplate or retarder has been specified to have two distinct indices
of refraction associated with different crystallographic directions, such
as those producing ordinary and extraordinary rays. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclass 18 for projectors with liquid crystal cell that includes
a variable or rotatable retarder and subclasses 117-118
for specific liquid crystal cell structures with birefringent retarders. |
|
| | |
| 489.08 | Beam deflector or splitter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.01. Subject matter wherein the birefringent element is used
to change the direction of the entire beam or a portion of the beam
for positioning purposes or is used to split the beam into two or
more portions.
| | (1)
Note. The polarization splitter may include a plurality
or an array of splitters. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 485.01, | through 485.07, and 487.04, for polarized beam
deflection and splitting using nonbirefringent medium. |
| 489.09, | for prism structures which could be used for beam
splitting. |
| 629, | through 638, for diffractive optical elements. |
|
| | |
| 489.09 | Prism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.08. Subject matter wherein the birefringent element has at least
two plane surfaces inclined relative to each other, from
which light is reflected or through which light is refracted.
| | (1)
Note. A prism may be employed for refracting or reflecting
light. Prism reflections are considered to be internal reflections; that
is, the light is inside the prism body both before and
immediately after the reflection. |
| | (2)
Note. The prismatic element may include a plurality
or an array of prisms (e.g., crossed
prisms, x-prisms or kernel prisms). |
| | (3)
Note. The prismatic element may also be doubly refractive, wherein
light incident on the prismatic element undergoes decomposition
into two rays, the ordinary ray and the extraordinary ray (e.g., Glan
prism, Wollaston prism, Rochon prism, Sernarmont
prism, Nicol prism, Feussner polarizer, etc.). This
phenomena occurs when the optic axis of the element is at an arbitrary
angle with respect to the incident beam direction (i.e., not parallel). |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 485.06, | for prisms used for polarization by reflection or
refraction. |
| 639, | and 640, for refraction at the beam splitting
or combining surface of a prismatic element. |
| 831, | through 837, for prisms, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclasses 8 through 9for projectors with liquid crystal cell which produces
S and P polarized light. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 20 for polarizers used with image projectors. |
|
| | |
| 489.1 | Adjustable element(s): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.09. Subject matter wherein the prismatic element is movable
to adjust the optical characteristics of the prismatic element (e.g., Soleil-Babinet
compensators). |
| | |
| 489.11 | Film or layer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.08. Subject matter wherein the polarization splitter includes
at least one thin film, layer, or coating of birefringent
materials.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 163.1 through 163.4for coating processes, per se, where
the product is an optical element. |
|
| | |
| 489.12 | Uniaxial: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.11. Subject matter including birefringent materials wherein
the refractive indices of two of the three orthogonal directions
are the same.
| | (1)
Note. Included in this subclass are both positive
and negative birefringent uniaxial materials. | |
| | |
| 489.13 | Biaxial: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.11. Subject matter including birefringent materials wherein
the refractive indices of all three orthogonal directions are different. |
| | |
| 489.14 | Lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.01. Subject matter wherein the birefringent element is a lens.
| | (1)
Note. A birefringent lens is defined as either a
single transparent mass of birefringent refractive material having opposed
refracting surfaces or a plurality of such masses arranged along
an optical axis with their opposed refracting surfaces disposed
transversely of such axis. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 489.18, | for optical systems with lenses and plural birefringent
elements. |
|
| | |
| 489.15 | Plural birefringent elements: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.01. Subject matter wherein beam polarization is achieved by
multiple birefringent elements.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 371, | and 386, for microscopes using polarized
light which may utilize birefringent elements. |
| 465, | for stereoscopic systems with polarizing elements
which may be birefringent. |
| 489.01, | for elements where the polarization varies over
surface of the medium. |
| 489.09, | through 489.1, for prism structures made up of plural elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclasses 8 through 9for projectors with liquid crystal cell which produces
S and P polarized light. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 20 for polarizers used with image projectors. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclass 19 for illumination systems with polarizing elements. |
|
| | |
| 489.17 | In parallel: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.15. Subject matter wherein the birefringent elements are arranged
transverse to the light propagation direction, i.e., positioned
in parallel. |
| | |
| 489.18 | With lenses: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.15. Subject matter wherein the optical system also includes
a plurality of lenses in series or in a lens array.
| | (1)
Note. Included in this subclass are optical systems
with plural birefringent elements including lens (or lenses) that
are NOT birefringent. | |
| | |
| 489.19 | Frequency filter or interference effects: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.15. Subject matter wherein plural elements act to pass a particular
frequency or band of frequencies, or wherein interference
effects are used to produce effects such as color or an interference
pattern.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 370, | and 371, for interference microscopes which
may utilize birefringent elements. |
| 487.01, | for color effects using dichronic medium. |
| 580, | through 590, for prism structures made up of plural elements. |
| 634, | for wavelength selective beam splitting systems. |
| 885, | through 892, for an absorption filter. |
|
| | |
| 489.2 | Mounting structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 489.01. Subject matter wherein detailed structures for mounting
the birefringent element are recited.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 819, | through 830, for generic lens mounts. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclasses 58 through 60for generic mounting structures to hold liquid crystal
cells. |
|
| | |
| 490.01 | By relatively adjustable superimposed or in series polarizers: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 483.01. Subject matter wherein the polarizers are positioned one
on top of another or arranged in a row and their positions are adjustable.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 489.2, | for mounting structure of superimposed birefringent
elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclass 18 for projectors with liquid crystal cell that includes
a variable or rotatable retarder. |
|
| | |
| 491.01 | With color filter: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 483.01. Subject matter where a polarizing structure is combined
with structure to selectively absorb or transmit specific light
wavelengths.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 485.03, | for similar subject matter where the only color
produced is a result of interference. |
| 487.01, | through 487.06, for similar subject mater where the color is produced
by a dichoric medium. (See (1) Note under
subclass 487.01 for the definition of dichronic.) |
| 489.19, | for similar subject matter where the only color
produced is a result of interference. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 349, | Liquid Crystal Cells, Elements and Systems,
subclasses 80 through 97for liquid crystal cell structure with color filter. |
|
| | |
| 492.01 | Polarization by optical activity: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 483.01. Subject matter wherein the material of the optical element
naturally rotates the plane of polarization of the incident light
beam without the application of any external applied fields (e.g., electrical, magnetic, stress
or pressure).
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 252, | Compositions,
subclass 585 for chemical compositions which produce polarized
light. |
|
| | |
| 493.01 | Polarization by scattering: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 483.01. Subject matter wherein a light beam is polarized as a result
of scattering or diffusing from an optical medium.
| | (1)
Note. The scattering or diffusing phenomena must
NOT follow Snell’s Law to be appropriate for this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 599, | for general optical elements that diffuse incident
light. |
|
| | |
| 494.01 | Depolarization: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 483.01. Subject matter wherein the optical element converts an incident
polarized light beam to produce an unpolarized, depolarized
or randomly polarized output light beam. |
| | |
| 503 | EXTENDED SPACING STRUCTURE FOR OPTICAL ELEMENTS: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including (a) means for maintaining
different types of optical elements significantly separated in a
fixed or adjustable relationship along the optical axis or (b) means for
maintaining lenses significantly separated as in a Galilean telescope
or door peep.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 744, | for afocal lenses (e.g., Galilean
telescopes). |
| 894+, | for optical apertures or tubes or transparent closures. |
| 896, | for miscellaneous optical devices. |
|
| | |
| 504 | Wide angle (e.g., door
peep): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 503. Subject matter wherein an objective element is designed
to give a wide field of view, usually at least 120 degrees.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 744, | for afocal lenses (e.g., Galilean
telescopes). |
| 819+, | for lens mounts. |
|
| | |
| 505 | With screen or reticle in real image plane: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 503. Subject matter including a real image display structure
or a cross-hair or emblem at a real image plane.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 369, | for a microscope with a screen. |
| 400, | for a telescope with a screen. |
| 422, | for a variable magnification telescope including
a relay and a reticle. |
| 424, | for a telescope with a relay and reticle. |
| 427, | for a telescope with focusing or relatively sliding
barrels and a reticle. |
| 428, | for a telescope with reticle. |
|
| | |
| 506 | Extension of tubular element adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 503. Subject matter including a sliding structure, a bellows, or
a telescoping structure for adjusting an optical barrel along the
optical axis relative to another structure.
| | (1)
Note. Other subclasses in this class indented under
subclass 362, Compound lens system and titled "Separation
of optical elements axially adjustable", "Variable
magnification" or including the word "focusing" may
include subject matter related to subject matter in this subclass. | |
| | |
| 507 | PROTECTION FROM MOISTURE OR FOREIGN PARTICLE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including structure to stop moisture or foreign
matter from coming into contact with optical elements or means to remove
moisture or foreign matter from optical elements.
| | (1)
Note. Storage or container, per se, for
an optical element is classified in Class 206, Special
Receptacle or Package, particularly subclasses 5+ for
eyeglasses or spectacles and subclasses 316.1+ for other
optical or photographic devices or elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 15, | Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning,
subclasses 300.1+ for cleaning machines involving air blast or suction. |
| 134, | Cleaning and Liquid Contact With Sol-ids, appropriate subclasses. |
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 162+ for an optical element produced with a coating
process. |
|
| | |
| 508 | Optical element rotates: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter where an optical element or a shield therefor
is rotated or otherwise moved to throw off moisture or other foreign
matter, usually by centrifugal force.
| | (1)
Note. The optical element may be rotated by any
motor including one operated by air passing over vanes as in an air
operated turbine. | |
| | |
| 509 | Fluid directed across optical element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter with structure to direct a fluid across an
optical element to blow or wash moisture, or other foreign
matter off or to pull such matter off by suction created by the
moving fluid.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 508, | for apparatus where fluid is directed to vanes, as
in a turbine, which rotates the optical element or a shield
therefor, such as a transparent disc in front of an objective
lens. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 15, | Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning,
subclasses 300.1+ for cleaning machine involving air blast or suction. |
|
| | |
| 510 | Microscope drape: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter including a thin flexible structure loosely
encircling a microscope to isolate the microscope from its surroundings.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 368+, | for microscope, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 206, | Special Receptacle or Package,
subclasses 305 and 316.1+ for a special container
for an optical instrument. |
|
| | |
| 511 | Cap or cover: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter wherein a usually flanged or flat member
covers the end of a barrel of an optical device in order to protect
an unused lens, located within a barrel, from
dust or from damage by impact with foreign objects.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 611+, | for a shade to deflect unwanted light from a lens. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 15, | Brushing, Scrubbing, and General Cleaning,
subclass 247 for a cover or cover holder. |
| 439, | Electrical Connectors, appropriate subclasses for movable or removable nonuse
covering means. |
|
| | |
| 512 | Humidity or temperature control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter with means for maintaining a desired humidity
level or temperature or for increasing or decreasing the humidity
level or temperature from its ambient value.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 395, | for a stage or slide carrier with temperature control. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 34, | Drying and Gas or Vapor Contact With Solids, appropriate subclasses. |
| 219, | Electric Heating,
subclass 219 for an electrically heated mirror. |
|
| | |
| 513 | Sealing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 507. Subject matter with means to seal the optical elements from
the atmosphere so that dust or moisture, etc., does
not fall on them. |
| | |
| 515 | SIGNAL REFLECTOR: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein elements may be specular or diffusing
to reflect a light to an observer for signalling purposes.
| | (1)
Note. The presence of a reflector usually is the
desired information communicated to an observer, i.e., any
light, as from an observer’s automobile headlights, reflected
from the reflector makes the presence of the reflector, and
thus danger or need for caution, known to the observer; however, in
indented subclass 527, below, some of the reflectors
reflect light from a traffic signal light to an observer or reflect
light from a source to an observer merely to determine if the source
is operating. |
| | (2)
Note. The structure of signs with the nominal recitation
of a signal reflector are classified in Class 40. In particular an "indicia" design
or the conveyance of specific information would be classifiable
in Class 40. |
| | (3)
Note. Most of the patents in these subclasses relate
to highway traffic in the form of indicating the presence of an approaching
curve, vehicle, or pedestrian on a roadway. |
| | (5)
Note. Since Class 359 is considered superior to
Class 116 (See Lines With Other Classes and Within This
Class), the use of a signal reflector as a signal source
or indicator will be classified in Class 359, unless the
details of the signals and indicators are specified. |
| | (6)
Note. Track reflectors having utility with railroads
are classified in Class 246. |
| | (7)
Note. A nominal recitation, i.e., no
optical limitations, of a signal reflector combined with
the specifics of its support is classified in Class 248. |
| | (8)
Note. The patents of this and indented subclasses
are to use the signal reflector to attract attention as opposed
to being the source of illumination of Class 362. |
| | (9)
Note. A lens, as in a plastic tail light
of an automobile used to identify an automobile’s presence
to a following automobile, is classified in Signal Reflectors (subclasses
515+), rather than Lens (subclasses
642+). |
| | (10)
Note. A mirror, located along the side
of the road to cause a light flash for identification of the edge
of the road as an automobile approaches, is classified
in Signal Reflectors (subclasses 515+), rather
than Mirror, (subclasses 838+) since
a nominal recitation of a mirror claimed with other structure is
classified with the other structure. |
| | (11)
Note. The combination of an article of clothing
and a signal reflector is classified in this subclass since the
combination only is classified in Class 2, if not otherwise
classifiable. |
| | (12)
Note. The combination of an animal collar (i.e., nominal
recitation of a collar or harness) together with a signal
reflector is classified with the signal reflector of this and indented
subclasses, while a reflector claimed in combination with more
than a nominal collar is classified in Class 119, subclass
858. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 514, | for signal reflector sealing from moisture or foreign
particles. |
| 838+, | for mirrors which reflect a substantial portion
of incident light, but the reflected light is not used
for signalling purposes. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 36, | Boots, Shoes, and Leggings,
subclass 137 for light reflecting or illumination attached to
a shoe. |
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, sub-class 208 for a license plate and reflector,
subclass 219 for translucent mirrors with indicia, and
subclasses 582+ for illuminated signs which may include
reflective elements. |
| 116, | Signals and Indicators,
subclass 20 for helios graphic code signaling and subclasses
63+ for mechanical street traffic signalling structure, such
as a semphore, light shutter, or pointer. |
| 119, | Animal Husbandry,
subclass 858 for an animal collar including a reflector. |
| 246, | Railway Switches and Signals,
subclass 474 for railway track reflectors which are disclosed
as having special utility with railroads. |
| 248, | Supports,
subclasses 201+ for brackets and subclasses 466+ for mirror
or picture type supports. |
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 483.1+ for reflectors including luminescent, fluorescent
or phosphorescent material. |
| 264, | Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating
Processes,
subclass 1.9 for reflective type. |
| 301, | Land Vehicles: Wheels and Axles,
subclass 37 for protectors or trim members. |
| 313, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
subclasses 113+ for an electric lamp or discharge device with a
reflector integral therewith. |
| 340, | Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses for traffic and vehicle signal lights,
subclasses 815.4+ for visual indicator, and subclass 815.76
for lens type indicator. |
| 342, | Communications: Directive Radio Wave
Systems and Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio
Navigation),
subclasses 5+ for radar reflectors, i.e., reflectors of
radio frequency waves. |
| 362, | Illumination, for artificial illumination means,
subclasses 296.01 through 296.1for projectors with reflectors, subclasses
341-350 for constant reflectors, and subclasses 459-549
for illumination with vehicle structure. |
| 404, | Road Structure, Process, or
Apparatus,
subclasses 9+ includes reflector support structure combined with
road structure. |
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 162+ for optical element produced. |
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
subclass 98 for structurally de-fined web or sheet. |
|
| | |
| 516 | Body carried: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter including apparatus to enable a user (human
or animal) to carry the reflector.
| | (1)
Note. A reflector carried by the hand or wrist but
not worn by the user, belongs in this subclass, rather
than subclass 517. |
| | (2)
Note. The combination of either a flashlight or
a cane with an attached reflector, which is normally carried
by the hand, belongs in this subclass. |
| | (3)
Note. The combination of an article of clothing
and a signal reflector belongs in this subclass not with the apparel
of Class 2, since the combination only belongs in Class
2, if not otherwise classifiable. |
| | (4)
Note. The combination of an animal collar (i.e., nominal
recitation of a collar or harness) together with a signal
reflector is classified with the signal reflector not the collar
of Class 119, subclass while a reflector claimed in combination
with more than a nominal collar is classified in Class 119, subclass
858. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 517, | for a signal reflector that is part of or attached
to an article worn on the hand or wrist of the user. |
| 518, | for reflectors that are an integral part of the
clothing used as apparel. |
| 519, | for reflectors that are worn over clothing, but
not held. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 36, | Boots, Shoes, and Leggings,
subclass 137 for light reflecting or illumination attached to
a shoe. |
| 63, | Jewelry, for pertinent subclass(es) as determined
by schedule review. |
| 116, | Signals and Indicators,
subclass 35 for motion and direction indicators for vehicles. |
| 119, | Animal Husbandry,
subclass 858 for an animal collar including a reflector. |
| 340, | Communications: Electrical,
subclass 321 for portable self-contained (e.g., movie
usher’s signalling flashlight) and subclass 475
for turn signals. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclass 103 for wearing apparel or body support, subclass 104
for jewelry with wearing apparel or body support. |
|
| | |
| 517 | Worn by hand or wrist: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 516. Subject matter wherein the reflector is a part of or attached
to clothing or a device both of which are worn by the wrist or hand.
| | (1)
Note. A glove having a reflector is classified in
this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. A wrist band having a reflector is classified
in this subclass. |
| | (3)
Note. A reflector carried by the hand or wrist, but
not worn, is classified in subclass 516. |
| | (4)
Note. Safety belts, pins, etc., wherein the
sole function of the apparatus is to mount a signal reflector for
safety purposes are classified in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 516, | for reflectors that are carried by the body and
not worn by the user. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 2, | Apparel,
subclasses 158+ for hand or arm covering. |
| 36, | Boots, Shoes, and Leggings,
subclass 71.5 for preformed, externally applied, wear-connecting
attachments. |
| 63, | Jewelry,
subclasses 3+ for bracelets and subclasses 15+ for finger
rings. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclass 104 for jewelry with wearing apparel or body support. |
|
| | |
| 518 | Permanently fixed to clothing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 516. Subject matter wherein a reflector is attached to an article
of clothing and remains on the clothing when a person discontinues
wearing the clothing.
| | (1)
Note. Signal reflectors that are part of the clothing
a person wears and the clothing serves other purposes than as a mount
for a reflector are classified in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. A belt, having a reflector, worn through
the loops of a pair of trousers functions as an article of clothing
and is classified and in this subclass. |
| | (3)
Note. Signal reflectors that are transparent spheres
permanently fixed to clothing by glue, transparency, etc., are classified
in this subclass. |
| | (4)
Note. A helmet, hat, shoe, or
boot is considered clothing for this subclass, but Class
36, subclass 137 takes light reflecting or illumination
attached to a shoe. |
| | (5)
Note. A pin with a reflector is not permanently
fixed to clothing, but is classified in subclass 519. |
| | (6)
Note. A signal reflector permanently attached to
an animal collar, leash, or harness is classified
in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 519, | for safety belts, pins, etc., having
a reflector and the sole purpose of wearing the article is for safety
reasons. A safety belt is not worn through the loops of
a pair of trousers. |
| 538, | for minute transparent reflective spheres mounted
on a flexible substrate that is not clothing. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 2, | Apparel,
subclasses 158+ for hand or arm covering. |
| 36, | Boots, Shoes, and Leggings,
subclass 71.5 for preformed, externally applied, wear-connected
attachments. |
| 63, | Jewelry,
subclasses 3+ for bracelets and subclasses 15+ for finger
rings. |
|
| | |
| 519 | Worn over clothing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 516. Subject matter wherein the reflector is mounted on apparatus
that is placed over the apparel of a user.
| | (1)
Note. This would include a safety belt, a safety
belt harness, and pins that are worn solely for the reflecting
properties not as part of the normal dress of the person.
A safety belt is not used through the loops of a pair of trousers. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 516, | for a signal reflector that is held by the user
rather than worn. |
| 518, | for a belt used as an article of clothing for a
pair of trousers which also has a reflector integral or as part
of the belt. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 2, | Apparel,
subclasses 158+ for hand or arm covering. |
| 36, | Boots, Shoes, and Leggings,
subclass 71.5 for preformed, externally applied, wear-connecting
attachments. |
| 63, | Jewelry,
subclasses 3+ for bracelets and subclasses 15+ for finger
rings. |
|
| | |
| 520 | Moving: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter where the signal reflector is in a continuous
state of motion to be more easily observed.
| | (1)
Note. The continuous state of motion could be vibration, oscillation, or
rotation on a specified device whether or not they are "claimed" as
rotating etc. |
| | (2)
Note. The motion of reflectors resulting from vehicle
vibration, vehicle wheels, wind action, etc., are
considered to be an irregular nature for this subclass and not periodic. |
| | (3)
Note. The beam deflection caused by a nonperiodic
moving reflector solely to present a clearer observation of the reflector
belong in this subclass not beam
deflection by the reflector to communicate some specific information
via the modulation produced by the signal reflector beam deflection. |
| | (4)
Note. Rigidly mounted reflectors such as bicycle
reflectors mounted on the frame do not belong here but in subclass 550. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 212.1 | through 215.1, for a periodically moving reflector to produce light
beam deflection/scanning without modulation. |
| 508, | for rotating reflector to throw off moisture or
foreign particle. |
| 526, | for reflectors that are wobbly mounted on the support. |
| 549+, | for reflectors rigidly mounted to a vehicle in order
to move exactly as the vehicle. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclass 208 for a license plate and reflector, subclasses
427+ and 446+ for display devices that simulate motion
or a changing exhibitor, subclasses 582+ for illuminated
signs which may include reflective elements. |
| 116, | Signals and Indicators,
subclasses 28+ for vehicle, subclasses 46+ for rotatable
motion and direction indicators for vehicles, and subclass
56 for vehicle-energy actuated. |
| 246, | Railway Switches and Signals,
subclass 125 for electric automatic highway signals, mine
doors, and gates. |
|
| | |
| 521 | Pedal mounted: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 520. Subject matter wherein the reflector is attached to the
pedal of a vehicle that requires pedal movement for vehicle motion.
| | (1)
Note. These patents are generally bicycle pedals
but are not limited only to bicycles. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 523, | for spoke mounted moving reflectors. |
| 524, | for tire, valve stem, wheel, hub
cap, or axle mounted moving reflectors. |
| 550, | for reflectors rigidly mounted to a bicycle or motorcycle. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 74, | Machine Element or Mechanism,
subclass 560 for pedals and subclasses 594.4 for pedals
connected to a crank. |
|
| | |
| 522 | Rotating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 520. Subject matter wherein the reflector movement is rotational
about some axis.
| | (1)
Note. This includes reflectors that are rotated
by the gases expelled from the exhaust pipe of a vehicle. |
| | (2)
Note. The structure of signs with the nominal recitation
of a signal reflector are classified in Class 40. In particular, an "indicia" design
or the conveyance of specific information would be classifiable
in Class 40. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 508, | for optical elements that are rotated for protection
from moisture or foreign particles. |
| 520, | for reflectors that appear to move but are stationary
and moving apertures in front of the reflectors make them appear
to be moving. |
| 525, | for wind driven rotating reflectors. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclasses 430+ for rotatable displays with special effects. |
| 116, | Signals and Indicators,
subclasses 28+ for vehicle, subclasses 46+ for rotatable
motion and direction indicators for vehicles, and subclass
56 for vehicle-energy actuated. |
|
| | |
| 523 | Spoke mounted: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 522. Subject matter wherein the reflector is attached onto one
or more spokes that position the rim from the hub.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes bicycle and motorcycle
spokes as well as any other type of spoked wheel. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 521, | for pedal mounted moving reflectors. |
| 524, | for tire, valve stem, wheel, hub
cap, or axle mounted moving signal reflectors. |
| 550, | for reflectors rigidly mounted on a bicycle or motorcycle. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 301, | Land Vehicles: Wheels, and
Axles,
subclass 37 for wheel covers fastened to the spokes of a wheel. |
| 340, | Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses for bicycle traffic and vehicle
communications. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 473+ with a bicycle or motorcycle supporting the illumination
source. |
|
| | |
| 524 | Tire, wheel, valve stem, hub
cap, or axle mounted: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 522. Subject matter wherein the reflector is attached to either
a rotating tire, valve stem, wheel, hub cap, or
axle of a vehicle.
| | (1)
Note. This also includes reflectors attached to
or part of a dust cover of a valve stem. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 521, | for pedal mounted moving reflectors. |
| 523, | for spoke mounted moving reflectors. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclass 587 for tire and wheel signs. |
| 138, | Pipes and Tubular Conduits,
subclass 89.4 for inflation stem dust covers. |
| 301, | Land Vehicles: Wheels, and
Axles,
subclass 37 for wheel protectors or trim members, or
wheel covers fastened to the spokes of a wheel, and subclass
108 for wheel hub caps. |
| 340, | Communications: Electrical, appropriate subclasses for bicycle traffic and vehicle
communications. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 473+ with a bicycle or motorcycle supporting the illumination
source. |
|
| | |
| 525 | Wind driven: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 522. Subject matter wherein the rotation of the reflector, attached
to a vehicle, is controlled by wind.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclass 440 for rotatable fluid operated display with special
effects and subclass 479 for rotatable fluid operated changing exhibitor. |
| 116, | Signals and Indicators, digest 7 for fluid actuated. |
| 446, | Amusement Devices: Toys,
subclasses 217+ for fluid driven rotatable blade (e.g., pinwheel). |
|
| | |
| 526 | Vibration: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 520. Subject matter wherein the signal reflector attracts attention
by its own random movement relative to its support.
| | (1)
Note. This reflector is not driven by any motor
or other source of energy such as the wheel of a vehicle or the
wind. |
| | (2)
Note. The reflector is wobbly mounted with respect
to its support. |
| | (3)
Note. The reflector has additional movement from
that created by its support (i.e., it
is suspended from its support bracket). |
| | (4)
Note. Reflectors rigidly mounted to a support via
a helical or other spring belong in this subclass since they will vibrate. |
| | (5)
Note. A reflector attached to a mudflap of a vehicle
would be classified here since the movement of the mudflap having
the reflector attracts attention. |
| | (6)
Note. Rigidly mounted reflectors such as bicycle
reflectors mounted on the frame do not belong here but in subclass 550. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 520, | for reflectors that are in a continuous state of
motion relative to their support. |
| 549, | for reflectors that are rigidly mounted on a moving
vehicle. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclasses 613+ for vibratory signs. |
|
| | |
| 527 | For a signal source remote from observer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter including structure to reflect light from
a signal originating from a source remote from the observer, i.e., not
coming from a light source at the location of the observer.
| | (1)
Note. This structure may be merely a plane mirror
mounted on an automobile hood to reflect light from an overhead traffic
signal to the driver or it may be a reflector at a street intersection
which reflects light from the headlights of one car to the driver
of another car travelling in a direction approximately 90 degrees different
than that of the first car. |
| | (2)
Note. Road reflectors remote from the vehicle, to
reflect all of an automobile’s headlight beams back to
the driver are not classified in this subclass since the source
of the vehicle headlight beams are at the location of the observer. |
| | (3)
Note. The reflection of the light beams of one vehicle’s
headlights to another vehicle would be classified in this subclass. |
| | (4)
Note. A reflector which reflects a portion of the
light output of a vehicle’s headlight or taillight to be
observable by the driver of the vehicle is classified in this subclass, rather
than Class 362, since the reflection is for observation rather
than illumination. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 529+, | for 3 corner retroreflectors which return a light
beam back to the source. |
| 531, | for unitary retroreflectors mounted on the road
surface. |
| 546+, | for plural reflecting elements for a single sheet
or plate such as in some road reflectors. |
| 551, | for reflectors mounted on the roadway that reflect
the light from a vehicle back to the driver of the vehicle. |
| 552, | for reflectors mounted adjacent the roadway which
reflect the light beams from a vehicle’s headlights back
to the driver of the vehicle. |
| 838, | for similar mirrors which are not dis-closed
as signal mirrors, which only have to reflect light, but
which are disclosed as reflecting images. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclass 559 for illuminated sign external light source if indicia
is present. |
| 246, | Railway Switches and Signals,
subclass 474 for track reflectors. A railway and switch
in combination with a nominally recited signal reflector are also
classified in this class (246). |
| 248, | Supports,
subclasses 476+ for adjustable mirror or picture position. |
| 296, | Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops,
subclass 97.1 for glare or screen body and subclass 97.2
for specific structure or properties for diffusing or reflecting
light to reduce the glare on the viewer’s eyes. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 341+ for a reflector light modifier. |
| 404, | Road Structure, Process, or
Apparatus,
subclass 16 for reflectors used to detect the presence of traffic. |
|
| | |
| 528 | Light transmitting from source behind a reflector: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter where the reflector is adapted to transmit
light from a source which is behind the surface of the reflector
which is normally viewed, such as in a tail-light
reflector which transmits light from a light bulb behind the reflector
or lens and also reflects a large amount of light which is directed
to the front surface of the reflector by an external source such
as the headlights of an approaching automobile.
| | (1)
Note. The patents of this subclass use a signal
reflector combination with a light source behind the reflector in
order to attract attention of other vehicles, either by
the light source itself or reflection of the other vehicle’s
light. |
| | (2)
Note. The use of a reflector to change (i.e., concentrate, disperse, collimate) the light
from a source for illumination purposes belong in Class 362 (e.g., the reflector
behind the light source of a headlight used to direct the outgoing beam
in a particular pattern). |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 549, | for a taillight that reflects incoming light from
a reflector behind the light source that transmits away from the vehicle. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 296.01 through 296.1for a light source and modifier including a reflector
where the reflector is used to modify the outgoing source light
beam, subclasses 341-350 for reflector light modifiers, subclasses
459-549 for illumination with vehicle structure, and
subclass 494 for mirror or reflector with vehicle structure (e.g., rear
view mirror). |
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
subclass 31 for vehicle body ornament. |
|
| | |
| 529 | 3-Corner retroreflective (i.e., cube
corner, trihedral, or triple reflector type): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter wherein the light is reflected from three
reflecting surfaces and wherein after the three reflections, it
moves in a direction opposite to and parallel to its direction before the
three reflections.
| | (1)
Note. The reflections may be external or internal, i.e., the
light may be reflected without entering the material from which the
reflector is made or the light may enter one surface of the reflector, be reflected
three times internally, and exit through the same surface. |
| | (2)
Note. Single or plural 3-corner reflectors
are classified in this subclass but plural reflectors formed into
a single substrate are classified in subclass 530. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 527, | for a structure which reflects light from a signal
source remote from an observer. |
| 530, | for plural 3-corner reflectors in a single
substrate. |
| 831+, | for prisms, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclasses 357+ for a mold with separating or clamping. |
| 72, | Metal Deforming,
subclasses 379.2+ for deforming sheet metal. |
| 204, | Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy,
subclass 281 for electroforming mold or strips, plates, electrodes apparatus
for forming electrolytic elements. |
| 228, | Metal Fusion Bonding,
subclasses 141.1+ for the process of shaping. |
| 249, | Static Molds,
subclass 117 for container type molding device. |
| 264, | Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes,
subclass 1.9 for reflective composite or multilayer optical
article shaping or treating. |
| 342, | Communications: Directive Radio Wave
Systems and Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio
Navigation),
subclasses 7+ for radio wave cube corner reflectors. |
| 425, | Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
Apparatus,
subclass 403 for shaping surfaces, per se, and subclass
808 for lens mold. |
|
| | |
| 530 | Unitary plate or sheet comprising plural reflecting elements: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 529. Subject matter wherein the reflective elements, such
as the individual triple reflectors, are part of a single
plate or sheet comprising a plurality of the 3-corner reflective
elements.
| | (1)
Note. The reflective elements are a part of the
structure of the plate or sheet. |
| | (2)
Note. Many of these retroreflectors are used on
highways for road makers. |
| | (3)
Note. Plural reflectors combined into a single substrate
are classified in this subclass whereas plural reflectors using multiple
substrates are classified in subclass 529. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclasses 357+ for a mold with separating or clamping. |
| 72, | Metal Deforming,
subclasses 379.2+ for deforming sheet metal. |
| 204, | Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy,
subclass 281 for electroforming mold or strips, plates, electrodes apparatus
for forming electrolytic elements. |
| 228, | Metal Fusion Bonding,
subclasses 141.1+ for the process of shaping. |
| 249, | Static Molds,
subclass 117 for container type molding device. |
| 264, | Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes,
subclass 1.9 for reflective composite or multilayer optical
article shaping or treating. |
| 342, | Communications: Directive Radio Wave
Systems and Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio
Navigation),
subclasses 7+ for radio wave cube corner reflectors. |
| 404, | Road Structure, Process, or
Apparatus,
subclass 14 for lane marker impregnated with reflective material, subclass
16 for vibration inducing member including a reflector. |
| 425, | Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
Apparatus,
subclass 403 for shaping surfaces, per se, and subclass
808 for lens mold. |
|
| | |
| 531 | Mounted on roadway: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 530. Subject matter wherein the reflector is positioned onto
the vehicle road surface in order to enable easier viewing of that
portion of the roadway.
| | (1)
Note. A reflector sign, having a unitary plate
of 3-corner reflectors, permanently fastened to
a road surface would belong in this subclass but the same reflector counterbalanced
within a recess in the roadway - ordinarily up and visible
but capable of retraction into the recess when contacted by the
vehicle wheel - is classified in Class 404. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 514, | for signal reflector sealing from moisture or foreign
particle. |
| 547, | for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements
mounted on or adjacent the roadway. |
| 551, | for a broad reflector mounted on the roadway. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclass 612 for highway or street marker. |
| 180, | Motor Vehicles,
subclass 168 having controlling apparatus adapted to interact
with stationary apparatus which describes the course of the vehicle’s travel. |
| 404, | Road Structure, Process, or
Apparatus,
subclasses 9+ for traffic director where the reflector is not
permanently fixed to the road surface. |
|
| | |
| 532 | Mounted adjacent roadway: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 530. Subject matter wherein the reflector is positioned off of
the roadway surface but within viewing distance of the driver of
a vehicle in order to enable easier viewing of the edge of the roadway.
| | (1)
Note. A reflector sign permanently fastened to a
road surface would belong in this subclass but the same reflector
counterbalanced within a recess in the roadway - ordinarily
up and visible but capable of retraction into the recess when contacted
by the vehicle wheel is classified in Class 404. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 514, | for signal reflector sealing from moisture or foreign
particle. |
| 547, | for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements
mounted on or adjacent the roadway. |
| 552, | for a broadly recited reflector mounted adjacent
the roadway. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclass 612 for highway or street marker. |
| 116, | Signals and Indicators,
subclasses 63+ for street traffic where the device for giving
signals are generally due to some movement of some part or element
from a normal or nonsignalling or signal-controlled position (e.g., a semaphore). |
| 180, | Motor Vehicles,
subclass 168 having controlling apparatus adapted to interact
with stationary apparatus which describes the course of the vehicle’s travel. |
| 404, | Road Structure, Process, or
Apparatus,
subclasses 9+ for traffic director where the reflector is not
permanently fixed to the road surface. |
|
| | |
| 533 | Mounted on vehicle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 530. Subject matter wherein the reflector is positioned on a
vehicle.
| | (1)
Note. This vehicle could be an airplane, boat, automobile, train, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 548, | for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary
mass mounted on a vehicle. |
| 549, | for broadly recited reflectors mounted on a vehicle. |
|
| | |
| 534 | Including a curved refracting surface: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter including a surface which is curved and which
refracts or bends the light before or after it is reflected.
| | (1)
Note. The reflector operates as a separate function
and is located behind the actual curved refracting surface. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 546+, | for reflecting elements formed as a unitary piece. |
| 642+, | for lenses generally, and especially subclasses
727+ for lenses including concave or convex reflecting
surfaces. |
|
| | |
| 535 | Within individual indentations: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 534. Subject matter wherein the curved refracting surface is
positioned either within an indentation of the substrate or within
a socket created by a plurality of elements to hold it in place.
| | (1)
Note. Multiple minute spheres used to retain a much
larger curved refracting optical element within a socket for the larger
element belong in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. These indentations can be produced by a platen
which forces refracting beads against a substrate to form indentations, thus
producing separate indentations for each bead. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 543, | for individual reflector (not microsphere) element
mount. |
|
| | |
| 536 | Minute transparent spheres: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 534. Subject matter where the elements which refract and reflect
are tiny transparent spheres, commonly called "little
glass beads".
| | (1)
Note. The elements may be partially or fully embedded.
The matrix may be attached to a surface of any shape such as a spherical
or a flat surface. |
| | (2)
Note. These spheres range in size between 3-6
mils (i.e., 0.003 - 0.006 inches). |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 539, | for a mixture of spheres in a liquid binder (e.g., paint
or resin). |
| 540, | for spheres placed on top of a binder (e.g., resin, asphalt, glue). |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 501, | Compositions: Ceramic,
subclass 34 for reflective glass beads. |
| 523, | Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,
subclass 219 for process of forming glass void. |
|
| | |
| 537 | Directional reflection (e.g., prevent
viewing unless critical angle of light is used): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter wherein the reflective structure behind the
spheres is arranged to permit viewing of the image behind the spheres, only
if the incident light is transmitted to the spheres at the desired
critical angle.
| | (1)
Note. The directional reflection of this subclass
permits viewing of the image only by those authorized (i.e., knowing the
angle). |
| | (2)
Note. The image is not changed by the directional
reflection but observation is accomplished dependent upon viewing at
the proper angle. |
| | (3)
Note. A picture that is covered by a substrate containing
minute glass spheres to permit viewing of the picture via the reflected
light only if the incident light is at a predetermined angle belongs
in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 380, | Cryptography,
subclass 54 for modifying optical image (e.g., transmissive overlay) by
changing its visible appearance. |
|
| | |
| 538 | On flexible substrate (e.g., flexible
sheeting, bumper sticker, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter wherein the spheres are placed on a flexible
material by transfer, glue, etc., and
this material can be used for an reflective purpose.
| | (1)
Note. Spheres embedded in a resin that remains flexible (e.g., elastomeric
composition) are classified in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 518, | for signal reflectors (e.g., transparent spheres, etc.) permanently
fixed to clothing (e.g., by
glue, transparency, etc.). |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 2, | Apparel, for apparel, per se. |
|
| | |
| 539 | Mixture in liquid binder (e.g., paint, resin): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter wherein the spheres are located within the
mixture of paint or resin and are simultaneously applied to the
surface as a complete mixture.
| | (1)
Note. This mixture can be painted onto signs, vehicles, or
roadway surfaces. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 540, | for spheres that are placed on top of a binder prior
to the hardening of the binder. |
| 551, | for reflective paint that does not have minute spheres. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 106, | Compositions: Coating or Plastic,
subclasses 228 and 253 for a natural resin or derivative containing
filler, dye, or pigment. |
| 523, | Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,
subclass 527 for glass DNRM nonreactive material mixed with
a composition. |
|
| | |
| 540 | Placed on top of binder (e.g., resin, asphalt, glue, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 536. Subject matter wherein the binder is first placed on the
surface and subsequently, prior to hardening of the binder, the
spheres are placed thereon to ensure that they are fixed to the
surface via the binder.
| | (1)
Note. This includes exposed spheres which are glued
to the surface, resulting in an exposed glass-sphere
surface. |
| | (2)
Note. Spheres which are not completely surrounded
by the binder belong in this subclass. |
| | (3)
Note. A monolayer (single) of
spheres on a binder belong in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 539, | for spheres which are completely surrounded by the
binder. |
|
| | |
| 541 | With single transparent coating between spheres and atmosphere: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 540. Subject matter wherein a single coating, which is
transparent to light, surrounds and either (1) completely
envelopes the normally exposed surface of the sphere, (2) touches
only a portion of the spheres, or (3) is
an interface for the minute spheres where the spheres are confined but
not touching the exposed surface.
| | (1)
Note. This single coating will cover the sphere
relative to the environment yet have no optical effect on the light
that would impinge on a normally exposed surface of the sphere.
If reference is made to protection of the reflector from moisture
or foreign particle it belongs in subclass 514. |
| | (2)
Note. A transparent coating used simply to hold
the spheres onto the binder is not considered a sealer as in subclass
514. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 514, | for a sealed signal reflector to protect it from
moisture or foreign particle. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
subclass 34 for light transmissive sheets with gas space therebetween
and edge sealed (e.g., double glazed
storm window, etc.). |
|
| | |
| 542 | Plural refracting elements formed as a unitary mass: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 534. Subject matter including a unitary mass of transparent material
which comprises a plurality of curved refracting surfaces.
| | (1)
Note. This unitary mass performs refraction of the
incoming light prior to reflection by the reflector, and
also of the outgoing light after reflection. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 454+, | for projection screens having a unitary sheet of
plural refracting areas. |
| 530, | for plural cube corner reflectors which together
make up a unitary plate. |
| 546, | for discrete reflecting elements which comprise
a unitary mass. |
|
| | |
| 543 | With individual reflector element mount: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 534. Subject matter including means for mounting the individual
optical elements such as small socket-like mounts in which
the elements are inserted and held or further including means for
mounting the small socket-like mounts.
| | (1)
Note. Reflector buttons that simply reflect light
falling on them, autocollimating, without the
creation of a single image of an object at a focal point are classified
in this subclass rather than the lens subclasses of this class. |
| | (2)
Note. Although reflector buttons are often called "lenses" they
are not classified in the lens subclasses of this class unless they
create a single image of an object at a focal point. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 535, | for minute transparent spheres within individual
indentations. |
| 546, | for a multifaceted single glass reflector which
is considered a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements. |
| 642+, | for lenses, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclasses 201+ for a license plate with a theft-preventive
feature. |
| 404, | Road Structure, Process, or
Apparatus,
subclasses 9+ for reflector support structure combined with road structure. |
|
| | |
| 544 | Including a snap, spring clip, or spring retainer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 543. Subject matter wherein either the curved refracting surface
or the reflecting surface behind the refractor are individually
mounted on a support by being pushed into a retainer which opens
for entrance and closes around a portion of the element when it
is in the settled position or a coil spring holds each element in place.
| | (1)
Note. The snap or spring clip retainer could either
clamp onto the refractor/reflector or could be used to
clamp a retainer to a housing and the refractor/reflector
force fitted into the retainer. The combination of a
refractor/reflector and a retainer that is snapped into
a third device belong in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. A rubber slot into which the refractor or
reflector are pushed into for retention in the slot belong in subclass 543. |
| | (3)
Note. Although the reflector buttons of this subclass
are often referred to as lenses, these have not been crossed
into lenses since these simply reflect the light falling on them
rather than create a single image of an object at a focal point. These
buttons are often referred to as auto collimating. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 545, | for a mount using a threaded member. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 248, | Supports,
subclass 27.3 for holding an instrument in a panel by a biased
clip. |
| 267, | Spring Devices,
subclass 159 for a snap spring and subclasses 166+ for coil
springs. |
|
| | |
| 545 | Including a threaded member: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 543. Subject matter where the means for mounting includes a threaded
member for screw attachment and this can be used to mount the curved refracting
surface that is located in front of the reflecting surface.
| | (1)
Note. Reflector buttons that simply reflect light
falling on them, autocollimating, without the
creation of a single image of an object at a focal point are classified
in this subclass rather than the lens subclasses of this class. |
| | (2)
Note. Although reflector buttons are often called "lenses" they
are not classified in the lens subclasses of this class unless they
create a single image of an object at a focal point. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 411, | Expanded, Threaded, Driven, Headed, Tool-Deformed, or
Lock-Threaded Fastener,
subclasses 81+ for threaded fastener and means for restricting rotation
thereof relative to coacting substructure. |
|
| | |
| 546 | Discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary mass: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter wherein a plurality of reflective elements
are each part of a unitary plate or sheet.
| | (1)
Note. This unitary mass performs the actual reflection
of the incoming beam. |
| | (2)
Note. This includes a single glass reflector having
multiple facets. |
| | (3)
Note. The individual reflectors are arranged to
reflect light as if it came from one single reflector having a particular
characteristic. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 459, | for a unitary sheet comprising plural reflecting
elements on a projection screen. |
| 527, | for reflectors that reflect headlight beams to the
eyes of the driver. |
| 529, | for retroreflective reflectors that reflect the
light directly to the source of the light. |
| 530, | for a plurality of triple reflectors which are each
part of a unitary plate or sheet. |
| 542, | for a plurality of signal reflectors with a curved
reflecting and a curved refracting surface which are each part of
a unitary plate or sheet. |
|
| | |
| 547 | Mounted on or adjacent roadway: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 546. Subject matter wherein the unitary mass is positioned either
on or off of the roadway surface within viewing distance of the
driver of a vehicle in order to enable an easier view of that portion
of the roadway or the edge of the roadway.
| | (1)
Note. A reflector sign, having discrete reflecting
elements, permanently fastened to a road surface would
belong in this subclass but the same reflector counterbalanced within
a recess in the roadway - ordinarily up and visible but capable
of retraction into the recess when contacted by the vehicle wheel
is classified in Class 404. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 514, | for signal reflector sealing from mois-ture
or foreign particle. |
| 531, | for a unitary plate of 3-corner reflectors
mounted on the roadway. |
| 532, | for a unitary plate of 3-corner retrore-flectors
mounted adjacent the roadway. |
| 551, | for a broad reflector mounted on the roadway. |
| 552, | for a broadly recited reflector mounted adjacent
the roadway. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclass 612 for highway or street marker. |
| 116, | Signals and Indicators,
subclasses 63+ for street traffic where the device for giving
signals are generally due to some movement of some part or element
from a normal or nonsignalling or signal-controlled position (e.g., a semaphore). |
| 404, | Road Structure, Process, or
Apparatus,
subclasses 9+ for traffic director where the reflector is not
permanently fixed to the road surface. |
|
| | |
| 548 | Mounted on vehicle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 546. Subject matter wherein the unitary mass is positioned on
a vehicle.
| | (1)
Note. This vehicle could be an airplane, boat, automobile, train, etc. |
| | (2)
Note. This includes a single glass reflector having
multiple facets. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 533, | for a unitary plate of 3-corner retroreflectors
mounted on a vehicle. |
| 549, | for broadly recited reflectors mounted on a vehicle. |
|
| | |
| 549 | Rigidly mounted on vehicle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter wherein the reflector is rigidly attached
to any type of vehicle used to carry passengers.
| | (1)
Note. This vehicle could be an airplane, boat, automobile, train, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 520, | for reflectors that are in a continuous state of
motion relative to a vehicle. |
| 526, | for reflectors that attract attention by the random
movement with respect to the support. |
| 533, | for a unitary plate of 3-corner retroreflectors
mounted on a vehicle. |
| 548, | for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary
mass mounted on a vehicle. |
|
| | |
| 550 | Bicycle or motorcycle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 549. Subject matter wherein the vehicle is a two wheeled vehicle
in the form of either a bicycle or motorcycle.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 521, | for pedal mounted reflectors. |
| 523, | for spoke mounted reflectors. |
|
| | |
| 551 | Mounted on roadway: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter wherein the reflector is attached to the
road surface itself either in the form of individual reflector units
fastened to the road surface or reflective paint.
| | (1)
Note. Reflective paint, without minute transparent
spheres, for highway marking is classified in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. A reflector sign (not having a unitary
plate of 3-corner reflectors or a unitary mass of discrete
reflecting elements) permanently fastened to a road surface would
belong in this subclass but the same reflector counterbalanced within
a recess in the roadway - ordinarily up and visible, but
capable of retraction into the recess when contacted by the vehicle wheel - is
classified in Class 404. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 531, | for a unitary plate of 3-corner retroreflectors
mounted on the roadway. |
| 539, | for paint containing minute transparent spheres. |
| 547, | for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements
mounted on or adjacent the roadway. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 106, | Compositions: Coating or Plastic, subclasses 228 and 253 for a natural resin or derivative
containing filler, dye, or pigment. |
| 523, | Synthetic Resins or Natural Rubbers,
subclass 527 for glass DNRM nonreactive material mixed with
a composition. |
|
| | |
| 552 | Mounted adjacent roadway: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter wherein the reflector is permanently mounted
next to the roadway for viewing by the driver of an automobile and generally
reflecting the beams of automobile headlights.
| | (1)
Note. A reflector sign permanently fastened to a
road surface would belong in this subclass but the same reflector
counterbalanced within a recess in the roadway - ordinarily
up and visible but capable of retraction into the recess when contacted
by the vehicle wheel is classified in Class 404. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 532, | for a unitary plate of 3-corner retrore-flectors
mounted adjacent the roadway. |
| 547, | for a unitary mass of discrete reflecting elements
mounted on or adjacent the roadway. |
| 553, | for a reflector which is portable, i.e., temporarily
placed. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, subclass 612 for highway or street marker. |
| 116, | Signals and Indicators,
subclasses 63+ for street traffic where the device for giving
signals are generally due to some movement of some part or element
from a normal or nonsignalling or signal - controlled position (e.g., a semaphore). |
| 180, | Motor Vehicles,
subclass 168 having controlling apparatus adapted to interact
with stationary apparatus which describes the course of the vehicle’s travel. |
| 404, | Road Structure, Process, or
Apparatus,
subclasses 9+ for traffic director where the reflector is not
permanently fixed to the road surface. |
|
| | |
| 553 | Emergency or temporary reflectors (i.e., portable
self standing): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 515. Subject matter wherein the reflectors are used as temporary
barricades placed on or adjacent the roadway, foldable
or collapsible reflectors for use when a car breaks down or directing traffic.
| | (1)
Note. These reflectors are not rigidily mounted
but simply placed on the surface (roadway or adjacent areas) to
warn oncoming traffic of a necessary change in driving conditions
along the roadway. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 529+, | for 3-corner retroreflectors. |
| 532, | for 3-corner retroreflectors which are permanently
adjacent the roadway. |
| 534+, | for reflectors having a curved refracting surface. |
| 546+, | for discrete reflecting elements formed as a unitary
mass. |
| 552, | for reflectors which are permanently adjacent the
roadway. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 116, | Signals and Indicators,
subclass 63 for specific mechanisms for folding and expanding
a portable street traffic signal and indicator with only a nominal
recitation of a signal reflector. |
| 248, | Supports,
subclass 472 for a foldable mirror or picture type. |
|
| | |
| 554 | IMAGE STABILIZATION: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein an optical element moves or changes
its optical characteristic to compensate for vibrations, atmospheric turbulence, etc., to
maintain a stable image.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 399+, | for telescopes. |
| 401, | for a telescope with antirotation. |
| 402+, | for periscopes. |
| 407+, | for binoculars. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 74, | Machine Element or Mechanism,
subclass 5.22 for gyroscopes combined with other structure. |
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclass 201.1 for photocell control that could include image
stabilization. |
|
| | |
| 555 | By movable reflective structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 554. Subject matter wherein the motion or turbulence compensating
optical element is a light reflecting device for redirecting a light
beam and movable such that the combined effects of motion and reflection
provides the desired compensation. |
| | |
| 556 | Having plural reflecting surfaces: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 555. Subject matter having a movable compensation reflector having
multiple reflective surfaces.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes reflector binocular
devices wherein one side is stabilized relative to the other side. |
| | (2)
Note. This subclass includes image stabilization
of a reflective telescope. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 480+, | for binocular devices. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 149 for gyroscope or pendulum stabilized optical element
and subclass 250 for pendulum suspension of optical element or reticle
fiducial instruments. |
|
| | |
| 557 | By movable refractive structure: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 554. Subject matter wherein image stabilization is accomplished
via the movements of a light bending (i.e., refracting) optical
element.
| | (1)
Note. Gyroscopically supported lenses to compensate
for motion belong in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. Compensation for the bending of periscopes
also belongs here if the optical elements are movable for the compensation. |
| | (3)
Note. The refractive elements are moved individually
or as a unit to compensate for the instability of the image. |
| | (4)
Note. Motion picture cameras (Class 352) would
take precedence over this class but cross references for motion
picture camera lenses that are gyroscopically controlled for image
stabilization should go in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 33, | Geometrical Instruments,
subclass 268 for celestial straightline light ray type. |
| 89, | Ordnance,
subclass 41.09 for gyoscopically or pendulum controlled motor
operated ordnance training mechanism. |
| 248, | Supports,
subclass 123.1 for counter balanced stand and bracket. |
| 348, | Television,
subclass 208 for camera image stabilization. |
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclass 140 for focus control having gyroscopically controlled
lenses. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 149 for gyroscope or pendulum stabilized optical element
angle measuring or axial alignment. |
|
| | |
| 558 | DIFFRACTION: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a light beam is split and caused
to interfere with itself, which causes a change in the
direction of the beam.
| | (1)
Note. Diffraction bands result from interference
of one part of a beam with another, as when the ray is
deflected at the edge of an opaque obstacle, passed through
a narrow slit, or deflected by an optical element such
as a prism. |
| | (2)
Note. Diffraction usually, but not always, causes
a break-up of the light into bands or a spectrum.
Additionally, diffraction may also form a plurality of images
from an object or merely redirect it, as in light diffractive
scanners. |
| | (3)
Note. This subclass includes systems operating on
diffraction from a straight edge, a circular disk or aperture, a
slit or a grating; and also includes systems operating
on Fraunhofer diffraction (far field wherein the incident
light rays are parallel and the diffracted rays are brought to a
focus by a focusing means) or on Fresnel diffraction (near
field wherein the incident light rays arise from a finite source
and no focusing means are used for rendering the diffracted rays parallel, or
convergent). |
| | (4)
Note. Devices for producing moire fringes by shadow
casting through grating-like elements are excluded from this
subclass. |
| | (5)
Note. All diffraction has interference but interference
does not require diffraction. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 577+, | for interference of light waves. |
| 831+, | for prisms. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclass 59.1 for the process of bonding and subclass 154 for
bonding glass to metal. |
| 156, | Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
subclass 81 with melting or gasification of permanently associated
solid material in situ in airtight cavity. |
| 204, | Chemistry: Electrical and Wave Energy,
subclass 192.26 for the coating, forming or etching with
optical or photoactive deposition material by glow discharge sputter
deposition. |
| 264, | Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping and Treating:
Processes,
subclasses 1.1+ for optical article shaping or treating. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing, subclasses 485, 494, 499, and
521 for dif light interference, and
subclass 618 for moire fringe generation by shadow casting through
grating-like elements. |
| 365, | Static Information Storage and Retrieval,
subclass 124 for systems utilizing diffraction for selected
masking of information. |
| 369, | Dynamic Information Storage or Retrieval,
subclasses 109.01 through 109.02with diffrac radiation beam modification. |
| 382, | Image Analysis,
subclasses 210+ for pattern recognition using spatial filtering (e.g., holography). |
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 164+ for transparent base optical element production
and subclass 166 for vapor depositing. |
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
subclass 167 for parallel ribs or grooves. |
| 430, | Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof,
subclass 5 for radiation mask, subclasses 9+ for
imaged product, subclass 32 for making an optical device, subclass
323 for etching, and subclass 325 for elevated pattern. |
| 451, | Abrading,
subclasses 41+ for a process of grinding glass or stone. |
|
| | |
| 559 | Using Fourier transform spatial filtering: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 558. Subject matter wherein an optical Fourier transform is taken
of a diffracted beam of light and a spatial filter is placed at
the Fourier transform plane to spatially limit the output optical wave
to those having Fourier transform coefficients passed by the filter.
| | (1)
Note. A spatial filter is generally an emulsion
mask having a transparent annular region in an otherwise opaque region
used to eliminate undesired radiation that diverges from the optical
axis beyond the confines of the transparent region. |
| | (2)
Note. A spatial filter is sometimes referred to
as a mask used as an aperture to cause diffraction of the light
beam passing therethrough. |
| | (3)
Note. A Fourier transform of a wave function is
the amplitude representation of the components of each frequency
of a given wavefront. |
| | (4)
Note. Amplitude and phase information over a discrete
spatial area of the diffracted energy pattern is obtained by placing
a lens at one focal length from the aperture to produce a "Fourier
Transform", and the aperture at the second focal
plane of the lens creates a diffraction pattern. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 29, | for Fourier transform holography. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 382, | Image Analysis,
subclasses 181+ for pattern recognition where an image analyzing
system possesses the capability of identifying discrete patterns, subclasses
210+ for spatial filtering wherein the optical image of
each pattern to be recognized is transformed into a light amplitude
distribution that is proportional to the two dimensional Fourier
Transform of the pattern image, subclasses 276+ for
mathematical image transformation or pre-recognition processing
transformation of an image into another representation to facilitate
the acquisition or subsequent recognition of imaging patterns, and
subclasses 280+ for Fourier, Hadamard, or
Walsh Transform of an image prior to the recognition processing. |
| 708, | Electrical Computers: Arithmetic Processing
and Calculating,
subclass 821 for Fourier transform computation in electrical
analog computers. |
|
| | |
| 560 | For convolution (cross-correlation): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter wherein the optical Fourier transform spectrum
is mathematically convolved (cross-correlated) with
the spectrum of the spatial filter at the Fourier transform plane.
| | (1)
Note. As opposed to the perfect match of the correlation
function in matched filtering systems, the convolution
function indicates a partial match between the optical Fourier transform
spectrums of object and spatial filter. |
| | (2)
Note. A spatial filter is generally an emulsion
mask having a transparent annular region in an otherwise opaque region
used to eliminate undesired radiation that diverges from the optical
axis beyond the confines of the transparent region. |
| | (3)
Note. The cross-correlation function is
a measure of the similarity between two signals when one is delayed
with respect to the other. |
| | (4)
Note. "Convolution" and "Cross-correlation" are
interchangeable terms. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 365, | Static Information Storage and Retrieval,
subclass 106 for radiant energy. |
| 708, | Electrical Computers: Arithmetic Processing
and Calculating,
subclass 816 for optical correlation and convolution in electrical
analog computers. |
|
| | |
| 561 | For correlation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter wherein the optical Fourier transform spectrum
is mathematically correlated with the spectrum of the spatial filter
at the Fourier transform plane.
| | (1)
Note. Included in this subclass are the so-called "matched
filtering systems", wherein the Fourier transform
spectrum of an object is perfectly matched or correlated to a spectrum
presented at the Fourier transform plane (usually by means
of a previously generated spatial filter). |
| | (2)
Note. A spatial filter is generally an emulsion
mask having a transparent annular region in an otherwise opaque region
used to eliminate undesired radiation that diverges from the optical
axis beyond the confines of the trans-parent region. |
| | (3)
Note. Correlation is a measure, expressed
as a number between minus one and plus one between two sets of data, of
the similarity of two signals. |
| | (4)
Note. Correlation is also a relationship between
two variables where the strength of the linear relationship is indicated
by the coefficient of correlation. | |
| | |
| 562 | For changing zeroth order intensity: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter wherein the spatial filter located at the
Fourier transform plane is designed to have a positive effect (i.e., blocks, transparent, increase
intensity, etc.) on the zeroth order
term in the Fourier series representative of the light wave input.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 559, | for spatial filtering at the Fourier transform plane. |
|
| | |
| 563 | With diffraction grating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter wherein a series of very fine, closely
spaced parallel slits, or of very narrow, parallel
reflecting surfaces are included in the optical system, either
before or at the Fourier transform plane in order to produce a
succession of spectra when light is incident thereon at
a specific angle.
| | (1)
Note. An example of a diffraction grating is a glass
substrate carrying a layer of deposited aluminum that has been pressure-ruled
with a large number of fine equidistant grooves, using
a diamond edge as a tool. |
| | (2)
Note. Light falling on a diffraction grating is
dispered into a series of spectra on both sides of the incident
beam, the angular dispersion being inversely proportional
to the line spacing. |
| | (3)
Note. Phase gratings using Fourier transform filtering
also belongs in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 1+, | for holograms and holographic systems. |
| 560, | for systems using a spatial filter placed at the
Fourier transform plane for convolution (cross-correlation). |
| 561, | for systems using a spatial filter placed at the
Fourier transform plane for correlation. |
|
| | |
| 564 | With photographic media: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 559. Subject matter wherein a photographic negative, transparency, plate, etc., is
used at or near the Fourier transform plane to record the data at
that plane. |
| | |
| 565 | From zone plate: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 558. Subject matter comprising a plate of glass, usually
a photograph, on which there is a central spot surrounded
by concentric annular zones, alternately opaque and transparent, the
radii of the boundaries between the zones being proportional to
the square roots of the natural numbers 1,2,3, etc.
It has the property of forming a real image of a point on the axis, as
does a lens, but by a process of diffraction instead of refraction.
| | (1)
Note. Zone plates are also known as "Fresnel
zone plates". |
| | (2)
Note. The diffraction occurs from a circular diffraction
grating of variable spacing having focal properties, and
also including means for forming such a circular focal grating. |
| | (3)
Note. Phase zone plates are also included in this
subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
|
| | |
| 566 | From grating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 558. Subject matter wherein diffraction occurs at an optical
element having a series of very close lines or fine slits.
| | (1)
Note. The lines on the grating may be ruled grooves
or fine slits may be applied by other mechanical, photographic, holographic, or
chemical processes. |
| | (2)
Note. This subclass includes both amplitude and
phase gratings and also includes gratings having mounting means
therefor. |
| | (3)
Note. Excluded from this subclass are acoustic or
other compression wave diffraction gratings, see Search
Class note to subclass 358. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 1+, | for holographic production of diffraction gratings. |
| 285+, | for light control by causing a fluid or deformable
medium to act as a diffraction grating under the influence of compressional
waves. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 348, | Television,
subclass 291 for diffraction gratings which are used for frequency
separation in color television systems ("strip
filters"). |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 51 for devices which utilize diffraction gratings
in optical test devices involving infrared or ultraviolet application, subclasses
300+ for spectroscopic instruments, including spectrographic
devices in subclasses 305 and 328 which utilize a diffraction grating, subclass
334 for monochromators which use diffraction gratings, subclasses
485, 494, 499, and 521 for wavefront
division by diffraction in interferometers, and subclass
395 for optical test devices employing relatively movable diffraction
gratings. |
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclass 37 for an input/output optical coupler using
a grating. |
|
| | |
| 567 | For ornamental effect or display: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 566. Subject matter wherein the diffraction of light from the
grating is purely for an aesthetic or ornamental effect or for display
purposes.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclasses 427+ for display devices exhibiting special optical
effects. |
|
| | |
| 568 | For diffractive subtractive filtering: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 566. Subject matter wherein diffraction gratings are used to
diffractively remove unwanted spectral wavelengths from polychromatic
incident light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 885+, | for optical filters in general and particularly
subclass 888 for neutral or different density filters. |
|
| | |
| 570 | Nonplanar grating substrate (e.g., concave): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter wherein the diffractive surface of the grating
is of a shape other than planar, for example, a
concave diffraction grating.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 534+, | for a signal refletor having a curved refracting
surface. |
|
| | |
| 571 | Echelette or blazed grating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter wherein the diffraction grating is an echelette (sawtooth) type
of grating or wherein the grating is designed for maximum intensity
at a desired region of the diffraction spectrum.
| | (1)
Note. Theoretically, the most efficient groove
shape for any grating is a right triangle. The inclination
of its hypote-nuse is called the blaze angle because it determines
the direction in which a diffracted beam has its greatest efficiency. Such
gratings are termed blazed. |
| | (2)
Note. A blazed diffraction grating is one having
properly shaped grooves to concentrate most of the energy into a
single spectral order. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
|
| | |
| 572 | Reflection grating (e.g., retrodirective): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter wherein the grating reflects a desired wave
while at the same time allowing one or more waves to pass freely.
| | (1)
Note. A reflection grating reflects the desired
wave whereas a "transmission" grating passes the
diffracted light through the grating in the same general direction
as the incident light. |
| | (2)
Note. Aluminizing of a grating will cause it to
be a reflecting grating. |
| | (3)
Note. Reflection back in the opposite direction
to the incident light would be considered retrodirective. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 529+, | for 3-corner retroreflectors (i.e., cube corner, trihedral
or triple reflector type). |
| 838+, | for optical mirrors and other reflecting elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 342, | Communications: Directive Radio Wave
Systems and Devices (e.g., Radar, Radio
Navigation),
subclass 7 for radio frequency corner reflectors which are
retrodirective. |
|
| | |
| 573 | Variable grating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter wherein the optical characteristics of the
diffraction grating can be altered by the application of an external
force.
| | (1)
Note. Examples of variable gratings included in
this subclass are gratings comprised of electro-optical
or magne-to-optical stripe domains. |
| | (2)
Note. A stripe domain is a stripe-shaped region
having its own proper-ties, such as an ion-shiny
electro-optic stripe. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 95, | for liquid crystal devices exhibiting variable diffraction. |
| 240, | for temporal modulation of a light beam by changing
the bulk optical parameter. |
| 301+, | for polarizer light wave spatial modulation. |
| 483.01, | through 494.01, for polarization without modulation. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 365, | Static Information Storage and Retrieval,
subclass 122 for polarization information masking using magneto-optical
devices. |
|
| | |
| 574 | With curved or geometrically shaped corrugation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter wherein the grating has at least one ridge
or groove for the light to impinge and the edges of the ridge or
groove are either nonlinear or form some geometrical shape by the connection
of plural lines.
| | (1)
Note. The geometric corrugations are in the form
of a circle, parallelogram, rhombus, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 575, | for nonuniform corrugation width, spacing, or
depth. |
| 576, | for a laminated or layered grating which usually
has parallel corrugations. |
|
| | |
| 575 | With nonuniform corrugation width, spacing, or
depth: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter wherein the grating has at least one ridge
or groove for the light to impinge and the width, depth, height, or
spacing of each ridge or groove varies along the corrugation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 574, | for curved or geometrically shaped corrugations
of a grating. |
| 576, | for laminated or layered grating which usually has
parallel corrugations. |
|
| | |
| 576 | Laminated or layered: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 569. Subject matter wherein multiple layers of different optical
materials are formed into a single mass to form the optical grating.
| | (1)
Note. The corrugations of this type of grating are
usually parallel to one another. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 574, | for curved or geometrically shaped corrugations
of a grating. |
| 575, | for nonuniform corrugation width, spacing, or
depth. |
| 586+, | for laminated or layered articles which produce
nondiffractive interference. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 264, | Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes,
subclass 1.7 for composite or multiple layer optical article
shaping or treating. |
|
| | |
| 577 | LIGHT INTERFERENCE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein two light waves, as a result
of their relative phases, interact to produce a cancellation
or reinforcement of wave energy.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 370+, | for interference microscopes. |
| 489.19, | for frequency filter or interference effect where
the light is polarized. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclass 450 for optical test devices which utilize light interference. |
|
| | |
| 580 | Produced by coating or lamina: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 577. Subject matter wherein the light interference occurs by
applying multiple light beams to either (1) a
structure comprising a base material impregnated by causing a coating
material to extend or penetrate into the material or into the interstices
of a porous, cellular or foraminous material or (2) a
product consisting of multiple layers of material.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se, wherein the
product is an optical element. |
|
| | |
| 581 | By transmissive coating on lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter wherein a lens is provided with a transparent
reflection-reducing coating on surface of air-contacting
refracting portions.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 642+, | for lenses generally, and subclass 726 for
lenses coated with reflecting element. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclasses 30.1+ and 31 for processes of applying such a coating
or surface to a glass preform. |
|
| | |
| 582 | Layer having specified nonoptical property: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter wherein a layer of insulator or spacer is
placed between optical layers, the changes in thickness
of this layer control the location of the transmission bands in
the spectrum.
| | (1)
Note. A layer of dielectric material placed alternatively
between reflective or transmissive layers is classified in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. The location of the transmissive band is dependent
on the distance between the reflectors. As the distance is
made larger, the transmission bands move toward the higher
end of the spectrum, also the width of the transmission bands
and the distance between adjacent transmission bands decrease. | |
| | |
| 583 | Beam splitter or combiner: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter wherein light interference is produced by
partial-reflected or by partial-transmitted layers.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 629+, | and 639+, for light dividing or
combining by partial reflection or refraction at beam splitting
or combining surface. |
|
| | |
| 584 | Reflector: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter including a reflector or a reflective coating
layer. |
| | |
| 585 | Including metal or conductive layer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 580. Subject matter including a metal or an electric-conductive
layer.
| | (1)
Note. The metal or conductive layer is used for
static electric elimination, radio frequency shielding, producing
space charges of electricity, or heating the coated glass
to prevent fogging by condensation. | |
| | |
| 591 | BUILDING INTERIOR ILLUMINATION WITH REFLECTED, REFRACTED
OR PRE-DETERMINED ANGLE OF ENTRANCE OF OUTSIDE LIGHT: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including means to reflect or refract light
to the interior of a building from the exterior or to allow only
light from predetermined angles to enter the building.
| | (1)
Note. The light is usually sun or natural light.
However, light from an incident artificial source which
is outside for some other purpose, such as a street light, may
be directed into the building. |
| | (2)
Note. For classification here, the direction
of the light must be changed to facilitate its entry into the building
or for controlling the direction of light. A mere window
pane which is flat on both sides is not here but is in Class 52, Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), subclasses 204+. |
| | (3)
Note. A combination of nominal fiber optics structure
with structure appropriate to this subclass is classified here. However, similar
subject matter with details to fiber optic structure is classified
in Class 385, Optical Waveguides. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 290+, | for fluids which may be chemically or physically
altered to control the amount of light passing through a panel. |
| 483.01, | through 494.01, for light control with polarizers. |
| 601+, | for glare reducing structure. |
| 885+, | for light filters. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting,
subclass 559 for signs using external light source. |
| 52, | Static Structures (e.g., Buildings),
subclasses 204.1+ for windows. See (2) Note
above. |
| 126, | Stoves and Furnaces,
subclasses 561+ for solar heat collector. |
| 165, | Heat Exchange,
subclass 48.2 for solar heating and cooling. |
| 362, | Illumination, for artificial light directing, especially
subclasses 317+ . |
|
| | |
| 593 | Plural members in series: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 592. Subject matter including a plurality of unitary light transmitting
members arranged so that light travels sequentially from one member
to the other, the light being refracted or reflected by
the respective members. |
| | |
| 595 | With internal reflections: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 592. Subject matter where light from certain angles is internally
reflected, i.e., the light is
inside the transparent mass immediately before and immediately after
the reflection.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 593, | and 594, above which also have patents
that disclose internal reflection. |
| 598, | for internal reflection in single optical elements. |
|
| | |
| 596 | Slats or strips: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 591. Subject matter including a plurality of, usually parallel, thin, flat
or long narrow members which reflect or refract light rays.
| | (1)
Note. The slats or strips may be made of any material, for
example, metal, glass, or plastic.
They may be adjustable or stationary. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 227, | for opaque means insertable on light path. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 160, | Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or
Panel,
subclasses 130+ for plural slats or strips used as closures which
are not specifically designed to reflect or refract light. |
|
| | |
| 597 | With reflection: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 591. Subject matter wherein light is reflected at least once
from a surface upon entering the building.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 596, | for building interior illumination with reflecting
slats or strips. |
| 609, | for glare reduction in display windows. |
| 838+, | for mirrors not specifically designed for building
interior illumination. |
|
| | |
| 599 | DIFFUSING OF INCIDENT LIGHT: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein light is scattered into many different
directions and is not intensely polarized when it illuminates surfaces.
| | (1)
Note. With diffused light, a high brightness
level may be achieved with minimal glare. |
| | (2)
Note. Diffusion patents are classified here whether
it is purposeful, incidental, or undesirable. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 577+, | for light interference. |
| 591, | for building or interior illumination with reflectors, refractors, etc. |
| 601+, | for glare or unwanted light reduction. |
| 614, | for glare or unwanted light reduction with absorption. |
| 707, | for a diffusing lens which produces an image having
soft or indistinct outlines. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 313, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
subclass 116 for light diffusing with optical device or special
ray transmission envelope. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 355+ for diffusing type translucent or transparent (e.g., "shade") light
modifier with a light source. |
|
| | |
| 600 | BARREL END EYE GUARD (E.G., SHIELD
OR CUSHION, ETC.): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein an eye end of a barrel is shaped
to conform to the engaging portion of a viewer’s face for
providing a cushion to the optical apparatus or for shielding the viewer’s
eyes from undesired radiation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 611, | for a shade which restricts light which is lateral
of the optical path from striking an objective lens. |
|
| | |
| 601 | GLARE OR UNWANTED LIGHT REDUC-TION: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including structure to primarily reduce the
intensity of nonimaging light for an optical means or a viewer’s
eyes.
| | (1)
Note. Such intensity reduction may be performed
by blocking, absorbing, transmitting away, or
reflecting an undesired part of the light. |
| | (2)
Note. This and the indented subclasses include angle
discriminator, glare re-ducing mirror, mirror
with glare shield, and display window. For classification here, the
claims should include structure which reduces glare, as
indicated therein or in the specification. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 229, | for glare elimination by placing an opaque element
in an optical path. |
| 290+, | for light control by altering an optical medium. |
| 488.01, | for glare prevention by means of polarizers. |
| 580+, | for light interference coatings which reduce glare. |
| 591+, | for natural or sun light directing for illumination. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 296, | Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops,
subclasses 97.1+ for vehicle glare screens, per se. |
| 348, | Television,
subclass 834 for cathode-ray tubes combined with a
glare reduction filter. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 44+ for glare reduction in spectacles. |
|
| | |
| 602 | With mirror (e.g., mirror
with glare screen, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 601. Subject matter including an image reflecting mirror which
inherently reduces the glare otherwise coming from its reflecting
surface or wherein the image reflecting mirror is combined with
or includes structure which reduces the glare otherwise coming from
its reflecting surface or from behind the mirror.
| | (1)
Note. Anti-glare mirrors which modify the
light reflected from the face of the mirror are in the indented
subclasses 603+ below. This subclass (602) has shields
which primarilty control light from the sun and headlight which
comes from behind the mirror and would not strike the reflecting
face of the mirror. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 507, | for moisture protection shield which could also
be a light shield. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 296, | Land Vehicles: Bodies and Tops,
subclasses 97.1+ for vehicle glare screens, per se. |
|
| | |
| 603 | Anti-glare mirror: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 602. Subject matter with means to control the light going to
and from the mirror’s reflecting face to eliminate or reduce
the intensity of the light going to a viewer’s eyes.
| | (1)
Note. Since any mirror may be adjusted to reflect
given rays of light away from an observer’s eyes, the
disclosure must be relied on to determine if the purpose of using
the mirror is to eliminate glare. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 488.01, | for glare prevention by means of polarizers. |
| 602, | for mirror combined with glare screen or shield
where the light to be controlled is other than that which would be
incident on the mirror face. |
| 884, | for coated mirror used for purposes other than glare
reduction. |
|
| | |
| 604 | Adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 603. Subject matter including means to adjust part of the mirror
or associated glare reducing structure to modify the intensity of
or eliminate the light reaching the viewer’s eyes.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 248, | Supports,
subclasses 466+ for adjustable mirror supports. |
|
| | |
| 605 | Plural reflecting surfaces: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 604. Subject matter including a plurality of reflecting surfaces
which may be selectively positioned to reflect light to the viewer.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 608, | for a semi-transparent panel placed in front
of a mirror to reflect some of the light, before it reaches
the mirror, away from the observer’s eyes. |
|
| | |
| 606 | Prismoidal: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter including a wedge shaped transparent body, usually
silvered on the rear surface, which reflects light to a
viewer from the front surface or from the rear surface through the
transparent body.
| | (1)
Note. There are reflecting surfaces which are at
an angle to each other in subclass 605 above, but the reflective surfaces
are not on the same transparent body. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
|
| | |
| 607 | Reversible: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 605. Subject matter including two mirror surfaces mounted back
to back, one being more highly reflective than the other, with
means to select the surface to be viewed from a given position.
| | (1)
Note. The less reflective surface of these mirrors
is employed when the headlights of a following vehicle annoy the
driver of a car. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 840, | in general for mirrors which are mounted back to
back. |
|
| | |
| 608 | Translucent or other semitransmitting panel selectively
positioned in front of mirror: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 604. Subject matter including a translucent or other semi-transmitting
panel which may be positioned in front of the mirror to reduce the amount
of light reflected to the viewer.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 229, | for an opaque panel selectively positioned in front
of a mirror to eliminate the light reflected from the mirror to
a viewer. |
| 602, | for glare shield positioned near a mirror to reduce
glare from light coming from behind a mirror which is not incident
on the mirror reflecting face. |
| 605+, | for a semi-transparent mirror positioned
in front of another mirror. |
| 884, | for colored mirror or selective absorption means
with mirror. |
| 885+, | for absorption filter, per se. |
|
| | |
| 609 | Display window: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 601. Subject matter wherein the amount of glare or unwanted light
reflected to a viewer’s eyes from glass, which
is covering an opening in a wall or the like for light transmission
to enable the viewer to look in or out, is reduced. |
| | |
| 611 | Barrel end or lens mount shade: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 601. Subject matter including a tubular member which is secured
to a barrel end, a lens mounting, or a support
and which extends from a face of a lens, wherein the tubular
axis is coaxial with the lens axis.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 511, | for a cap or cover which protects a lens when it
is not being used. |
| 600, | for barrel end eye guard, shield or cushion. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 2, | Apparel,
subclasses 15+ for eyeshields and subclasses 431+ for
goggles included in a shield for eyes. |
|
| | |
| 612 | Collapsible or foldable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 611. Subject matter wherein a shade includes telescoping, flexible
or hinged portions to permit substantial reduction of the space
occupied by the shade when not in use. |
| | |
| 614 | With absorption means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 601. Subject matter including a layer of coating material or
a filter or screen, which absorbs part of the light incident
thereon.
| | (1)
Note. The light absorbed may be of particular wavelengths, e.g., color
filter, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 603, | for antiglare mirror coated with light absorbing
material. |
| 884, | for mirror coated with light absorbing material. |
|
| | |
| 615 | LIGHT DISPERSION: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including a body having an index of refraction
that varies according to the wavelength for separation of the spectral components
of incident light.
| | (1)
Note. A dispersive monochromator, which
separates the spectral components of incident light, is
classified in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. The optical system of a monochromator forms
a series, one for each wavelength, of its entrance
slit in the plane of the exit slit. | |
| | |
| 616 | KALEIDOSCOPE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including a plurality of reflecting surfaces
so arranged that objects viewed in the reflecting surfaces appear
as multiple images of the objects arranged in a symmetrical pattern, relative
motion between the objects and the reflecting surfaces or between
the reflecting surfaces and observer changing the patterns.
| | (1)
Note. The reflecting surfaces are usually elongated
and at an angle to each other which forms a V-shaped trough
when two mirrors are employed. |
| | (2)
Note. Kaleidoscopic image projectors which project
a real image on a viewing screen are classified in Class 353, Optics:
Image Projectors, if projection structure such as a projecting
lens, projection screen, projection light source, or slide
holder is claimed. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 1 and 2 for a kaleiodoscopic image projector.
See (2) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 617 | Including particles loosely housed for agitation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 616. Subject matter including a chamber of loosely assorted objects, usually
of irregular shapes, transparent and varicolored, which
may be tumbled over each other by rotation of the chamber or moved
in other ways to give ever changing visual effects. |
| | |
| 618 | SINGLE CHANNEL SIMULTANEOUSLY TO OR FROM PLURAL CHANNELS (E.G., LIGHT
DIVIDING, COMBINING, OR PLURAL IMAGE FORMING, ETC.): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein either (1) a single light
ray is used to produce a plurality of groups of different optical
axes light rays, which may have different directions or
be parallel and displaced relative to one another, each containing
the same information as the single light ray or (2) a
single light ray is derived from a plurality of groups of light
rays having different optical axes in order to include the same
information contained in each of the plurality of groups of light
rays.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes partially transmitting
reflector type beam splitters wherein each split channel contains identical
information. |
| | (2)
Note. This subclass includes a system comprising
a plurality of adjacent lenses which form a plurality of similar
rather than identical images as a result of parallax. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 462+, | particularly subclasses 464+ for somewhat
analogous structure used in stereoscopic systems. |
| 480+, | for systems including a single optical channel which
merges to or from a plural optical channel, where the plural
channel is used for binocular purposes. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclasses 66+ for color cameras and projectors. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 30+ for an image projector which combines subject matter
to form a composite image and which may include the combining of
light paths. |
| 396, | Photography,
subclasses 305+ for color cameras containing similar structure. |
|
| | |
| 619 | By surface composed of lenticular elements: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 618. Subject matter comprising a body with a surface configured
so as to form a regular array of reflecting or transmitting elements, each
having a curved or figured surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 455+, | for lenticular projection screens. |
| 463, | for stereoscopic record with lenticular surface. |
| 642+, | for lenses generally. |
| 727+, | for lenses having concave or convex reflecting surfaces
with coatings. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 399, | Electrophotography,
subclasses 30+ and 177+ for an optical element in a photocopier
projection arrangement. |
|
| | |
| 620 | Having particular composition: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 619. Subject matter wherein the configured body is composed of
a specific material.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 252, | Compositions,
subclass 501.1 for electrically conductive or emissive light sensitive
composition. |
| 430, | Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof,
subclass 946 for a cross-reference art collection of
photographically produced lenticular elements. |
| 501, | Compositions: Ceramic,
subclasses 900+ for an optical glass composition. |
|
| | |
| 623 | Cylindrical lenslets: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 622. Subject matter in which the body is formed by an array of
small cylindrical elements.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 710, | for cylindrical lenses. |
|
| | |
| 627 | Reflective: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 619. Subject matter wherein the direction of the component of
incident light normal to the surface of the lenticular body is reversed
or bent off. |
| | |
| 631 | Including curved reflector: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter including a reflecting element having a surface
with a smoothly concave or convex configuration in the optical path
of the light that produces an image.
| | (1)
Note. The curved configuration may be for focusing
or collimating reflected light rays. |
| | (2)
Note. Helmet mounted partial reflectors and curved
windshield light combining systems are classified in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 364+, | for compound lens system with curved reflective
imaging element. |
| 726+, | for lenses with reflecting element. |
| 831+, | for prisms, per se. |
| 838+, | for mirrors, per se. |
|
| | |
| 633 | With additional reflector (e.g., serial
reflections, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 630. Subject matter having an image reflecting element additional
to a partially reflective light combiner or divider.
| | (1)
Note. This additional reflecting element may be
another partially reflecting element. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 850, | for a plural mirror optical system. |
|
| | |
| 634 | Wavelength selective (e.g., dichroic
mirror, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 629. Subject matter wherein an optical property of the partially
reflecting light combining or dividing element for a component of
incident light is wavelength dependent.
| | (1)
Note. The term "optical property" is intended
to include transmittance and reflectance. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 583, | for a dichroic beam splitter or combiner using layers
producing light interference. |
| 838+, | for mirrors, per se. |
|
| | |
| 635 | Drawing or plotting aid: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 629. Subject matter including forming a composite image on a
surface on which visual information or other representation is manually
placed. |
| | |
| 640 | Including prismatic element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 639. Subject matter including a transparent optical element having
at least two polished plane faces, inclined relative to
each other, to cause refraction through the faces.
| | (1)
Note. A prism is geometrically constructed of parallel
bases or ends and congruent polygons and sides that are parallelograms
in order to either (a) disperse light into a spectrum
or (b) reflect rays of light. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 831+, | for prisms generally. |
|
| | |
| 641 | COLLIMATING OF LIGHT BEAM: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a bundle of light rays emanating
from a single point are made to be parallel to one another, as
opposed to converging or diverging rays.
| | (1)
Note. A collimator reticle will produce collimated
light wherein the light appears to originate from an infinitely distant
real or apparent source. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 642+, | for lenses. |
| 838+, | for mirrors. |
|
| | |
| 642 | LENS: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including either a single transparent mass
of refractive material having opposed refracting surfaces or a plurality
of such masses arranged along an optical axis with their opposed
refracting surfaces disposed transversely of such axis, the
said opposed surfaces being so shaped and spaced that the mass or
plurality of masses are capable of producing, from light
rays passing therethrough from an object external to the mass or
masses, a single image of that object at a focal point.
| | (1)
Note. The plurality of masses of material act upon
light rays proceeding from an object in a manner similar to that
in which the single mass of material acts upon such rays; i.e., no
real image is formed between the front most and rear most axially
spaced refracting surfaces of either the single mass or the plurality of
masses. |
| | (2)
Note. Of the opposed refracting surfaces provided
on each lens mass, one is usually spherical and the other
is usually spherical or planar, but there may be deviations
from such shapes in which any or all of the surfaces depart from
the spherical shape or the planar shape. |
| | (3)
Note. The lens masses referred to above will be
designated hereafter as lens "components" or lens "elements" depending
on the design of the lens. |
| | (4)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either a single transparent mass of
refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or a grouped
plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical axis of
the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either in full
overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the spacing
being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the lens
computations, the two refracting surfaces of the single
mass and the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of the plurality
of masses having at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced
from all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present
in the lens. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass or the axially extreme
surfaces of the grouped plurality of masses and the other adjacent
refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient
magnitude to enter into the lens computations in order to limit
the axial extent of the lens component. |
| | (5)
Note. The term "element" as applied
to a lens designates any single transparent mass of refractive material
having two opposed refracting surfaces, which surfaces
are disposed transversely of the optical axis of the lens and spaced
therealong, i.e., any one of
the masses in the above component definition regardless of its spacing
from adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens. |
| | (6)
Note. A correcting plate such as that used in the "Schmidt
type lens" to correct the aberrations of a spherical mirror is
considered a lens component under this subclass definition. |
| | (7)
Note. The optical system of a Galilean telescope
is considered a lens under this subclass definition, since
no image is formed between the objective and eyepiece of the telescope. |
| | (8)
Note. This subclass also includes, especially
in subclasses 726+, 737, and 738+, combination
of a lens or lenses with other than nonlens optical elements which
reflect, control or deflect light passing through the lens
and which are not provided for above. |
| | (9)
Note. This subclass further includes in subclasses
811+ lens supports and mountings for maintaining the various lens
components in proper alignment and spacing for intended operation
of the lens. |
| | (10)
Note. Compound lens systems in which one lens is
employed to examine the image formed by another lens will be found
in this class, subclasses 362+. |
| | (11)
Note. This is the residual subclass for lenses.
See the search notes below for classes where lenses peculiar to
particular applications such as signalling, illuminating, and
ophthalmic may be found. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 355+, | for lenses peculiarly adapted for operation within
the nonvisible spectrum. |
| 362+, | for compound lens systems. See also (11) Note
above. |
| 440+, | for scale-reading systems involving lenses. |
| 462+, | for plural optical paths including lenses or lenses
with plural optical paths. |
| 503+, | for lens-spacing structure. |
| 591+, | for natural light directing systems. |
| 611+, | for lens shades. |
| 619+, | for surfaces composed of lenticular elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 159.01+ for ophthalmic lenses or blanks. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclasses 124+ for lens or reflective image-former testing
devices and subclasses 128+ for refraction test devices
generally. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 317+ for illuminating refractor lenses. |
| 425, | Plastic Article or Earthenware Shaping or Treating:
Apparatus, appropriate subclasses for a molding apparatus used to
shape or reshape a nonmetal; see especially
subclass 808 for a cross-reference digest of such apparatus
including a lens mold. |
|
| | |
| 643 | Eyepiece: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens creates a magnified virtual
image of a rear object.
| | (1)
Note. The eyepiece in an optical instrument is the
lens or lenses nearest the viewer’s eye. | |
| | |
| 644 | Having four components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 643. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series along
the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 650, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components. |
| 660, | for microscope objective having four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 715, | for nonspherical lens system having four components. |
| 734, | for four component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 747, | for a telephoto lens having four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 771, | for multiple component lenses having four components. |
|
| | |
| 645 | Having three components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 643. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises three sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series along
the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 716, | for nonspherical lens system having three components. |
| 735, | for three component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 784, | for multiple component lenses having three components. |
|
| | |
| 646 | Having two components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 643. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises two sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses and the other adjacent refracting surfaces that
may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude to enter
into the lens computations in order to limit the axial extent of
the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 717, | for non spherical lens system having two components. |
| 736, | for two component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 793, | for multiple component lenses having two components. |
|
| | |
| 647 | Having one component: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 643. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises one section (i.e., component), containing
two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the optical axis
of the lens with their optical centers in alignment thereon, their
planes perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme refracting
surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that parallel light rays
upon entering and passing through all of such component is refracted
to a focus no more than one time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 718, | for nonspherical lens system having one component. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 796, | for a single component lens with multiple elements. |
|
| | |
| 648 | With field curvature shaping: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the curvature of the refractive surface
controls the altering of the curvature of the image or the production
of an image of a curved object field. |
| | |
| 649 | Projection type: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 648. Subject matter wherein an image of an image plane is caused
to be visible at an object plane. |
| | |
| 650 | Having four components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 649. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 644, | for eyepieces having four components. |
| 660, | for microscope objective having four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 715, | for nonspherical lens system having four components. |
| 734, | for four component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 747, | for a telephoto lens having four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 771, | for multiple component lenses having four components. |
|
| | |
| 651 | Having less than four components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 649. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises less than four
sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 645+, | for eyepieces having three or less components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 716+, | for nonspherical lens system having three or less
components. |
| 735+, | for three or less component multiple component lenses
with a reflecting element. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 784+, | for multiple component lenses having three or less
components. |
| 796, | for a single component lens with multiple elements. |
|
| | |
| 652 | With graded refractive index: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein a lens has an index of refraction
which varies in space.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 385, | Optical Waveguides,
subclass 124 for optical waveguides having a graded refractive
index. |
|
| | |
| 656 | Microscope objective: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the focal length of the lens is relatively
short and the lens produces a highly magnified real image.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643+, | for eyepieces which may be used in conjunction with
microscope objectives. |
|
| | |
| 657 | Having seven components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises seven sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 648, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 708, | for nonspherical surface variable magnification
lenses having more than six components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 745, | for telephoto lenses having more than five components. |
| 751, | for wide angle lenses having seven components. |
| 755, | for multiple component lenses having seven components. |
|
| | |
| 658 | Having six components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises six sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 649, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 713, | for nonspherical surface lens system having six
components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 745, | for telephoto lenses having more than five components. |
| 752, | for wide angle lenses having six components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 756, | for multiple component lens having six components. |
|
| | |
| 659 | Having five components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises five sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact, or in spaced parallel relation
with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not
enter into the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 648, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 714, | for nonspherical surface lens system having five
components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 746, | for telephoto lenses having five components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 763, | for multiple component lenses having five components. |
|
| | |
| 660 | Having four components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 644, | for eyepieces having four components. |
| 650, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 715, | for nonspherical lens system having four components. |
| 734, | for four component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 747, | for a telephoto lens having four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 771, | for multiple component lenses having four components. |
|
| | |
| 661 | Having less than four components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 656. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises less than four
sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 645+, | for eyepieces having three or less components. |
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 716+, | for nonspherical lens system having three or less
components. |
| 735+, | for three or less component multiple component lenses
with a reflecting element. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 784+, | for multiple component lenses having three or less
components. |
| 796, | for a single component lens with multiple elements. |
|
| | |
| 663 | Telecentric system: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein all of the primary rays are parallel
to the optical axis in either object or image space.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 740, | for particular diaphragms employed to produce the
telecentric result. |
|
| | |
| 664 | Spherical: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein one of the lens elements has two
convex refractive surfaces which are concentric and of equal curvature. |
| | |
| 665 | Fluid: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens has at least one component
or one element which uses a transparent liquid or gas as its refractive
material.
| | (1)
Note. The lens components or elements under this
definition may comprise either a mass of fluid supported in a capillary
channel which has its refracting surfaces freestanding and formed
by surface tension or a mass of fluid which is enclosed in and shaped
by a transparent shell or casing. In the latter form of component
or element, the fluid may be either a liquid or a gas, and
in addition to refraction, may perform other functions (e.g., cooling). |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 886, | for fluid filters. |
| 894, | for gas-filled telescope or microscope barrels. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 159.01+ for spectacle lenses having a fluid-refractive
element. |
|
| | |
| 666 | With variable magnification: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 665. Subject matter wherein at least one refracting surface of
the lens is deformable to vary the focal length of the lens.
| | (1)
Note. The refracting surface of the lens may be
accomplished by either applying mechanical force to the periphery
of the lens casing or varying the quantity of fluid within the lens
casing. In the type of fluid lens which has a freestanding surface
tension formed refracting surface, the refracting surface
may be deformed by impressing an electric potential upon the fluid
lens. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclass 159.68 for spectacle lenses of the fluid type having a
variable focal length. |
|
| | |
| 667 | With gas: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 665. Subject matter wherein the refractive material is a transparent
gas. |
| | |
| 668 | Anamorphic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens has or produces unequal
magnifications in two planes that are at an angle (usually
perpendicular) to each other.
| | (1)
Note. These lenses employ at least one element or
component having one or more cylindrical surfaces thereupon to produce
the unequal magnifications of the lens. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 710, | for lenses having elements or components with one
or more cylindrical surfaces thereon. |
|
| | |
| 669 | With prism anamorphoser: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter wherein the components that produce the unequal
magnifications in the lens are symmetrically refracting prisms disposed with
their refracting surfaces transversely of the optical axis of the
lens.
| | (1)
Note. The prism components may be mounted either
in a fixed relation to the optical axis of the lens or each of these components
may be mounted to rotate about an axis parallel to its refracting edge, in
which latter case the difference between the magnifications in the
two planes is variable. |
| | (2)
Note. See subclass 831 for the definition of a prism. | |
| | |
| 671 | Having four or more components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 668. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises four or more sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that does not enter into the
lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643+, | for eyepieces having four or more components. |
| 648+, | for field curvature shaping lenses having four or
more components. |
| 656+, | for microscope objectives having four or more components. |
| 708+, | for nonspherical surface lens systems having four
or more components. |
| 726+, | for lens systems with reflecting elements having
four or more components. |
| 745+, | for telephoto lenses having four or more components. |
| 749+, | for wide angle lenses having four or more components. |
| 754+, | for multiple component lenses in general which have
four or more components. |
|
| | |
| 672 | Selective magnification by exchanging or adding a lens
component: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein one or more components of a basic
lens are replaceable by one or more other components to produce
in combination with any remaining components of the basic lens having
substantially the same image plane as that of the basic lens but
having a different equivalent focal length from that of the original
basic lens.
| | (1)
Note. The number of original components removed
from the basic lens may not always be the same as the number of components
which replace such original components, in which case the
exchange of components may result in the addition of components
to the original lens. This subclass includes adding or
subtracting lens components, while subclass 819 relates
to the changing of the entire lens. |
| | (2)
Note. The prisms may be moved to vary the length
in one plane only, while in subclass 678 the prisms are
moved to vary the focal length in all planes. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 676+, | for variable magnification lenses generally. |
| 678, | for lenses wherein at least one component is formed
of symmetrically refracting prisms which are rotatable about axes
parallel to their refracting edges. See (2) Note
above. |
| 737, | for lenses combined with a nonlens refracting element
which is usually a wedge-shaped prism. |
| 744, | for a focal lens attachments to be used with lenses
to change the equivalent focal lengths of the lenses |
| 754+, | for multiple component lenses. |
| 821+, | for plural lenses in a common carrier selectively
operable. See (1) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 673 | To the front of a basic lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 672. Subject matter wherein a lens component is exchanged or
added to the objective side (i.e., front) of
a basic lens for selective magnification. |
| | |
| 675 | To the rear of a basic lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 672. Subject matter wherein a lens component is exchanged or
added to the image side (i.e., rear) of
a basic lens for selective magnification.c |
| | |
| 676 | With variable magnification (e.g., zoom type): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the equivalent focal length of the
lens may be continuously varied between predetermined limits.
| | (1)
Note. The variation of the equivalent focal length
of the lenses of this generic subclass is accomplished by axially shifting
certain components of the lens relative to other components. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 432, | for variable magnification compound lens systems. |
| 672+, | for lenses whose focal length may be selected by
exchanging, adding, or removing lens components. |
| 694+, | for mechanisms that axially shift the lens components
whereby the continuous variation of the equivalent focal length
is accomplished. |
| 754+, | for fixed focal length lenses. |
| 823+, | for mechanisms that axially shift the lens components
for the purpose of axially adjusting the focal plane of the lens. |
|
| | |
| 677 | Optically compensated: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter wherein the lens is physically linked and
dependently moved to maintain an equivalent focal length. |
| | |
| 678 | Prism lens type: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter where the lens includes prisms disposed along
the optical axis which are movable to vary the equivalent focal
length of the lens.
| | (1)
Note. See subclass 831 for the definition of a prism. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 669+, | for lenses with prisms which are movable for varying
the focal length in only one plane. |
|
| | |
| 679 | With fixed conjugates: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter wherein an object plane and its corresponding (i.e., conjugate) image
plane are fixed and are located at finite distances from the lens. |
| | |
| 680 | Reverse telephoto: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter wherein the lens includes a negative group
on the longer conjugate side and a positive group on the shorter
conjugate side with the spacing between these groups being varied
to vary the overall focal length of the combination.
| | (1)
Note. See subclasses 749+ for reverse telephoto
lenses that are not of variable focal length. | |
| | |
| 681 | Having eight or nine components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter wherein the reverse telephoto lens comprises
eight or nine sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact, or in spaced parallel relation
with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not
enter into the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 648, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 656, | for microscope objective having more than seven
components. |
| 708, | for nonspherical surface variable magnification
lenses having more than six components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 745, | for telephoto lenses having more than five components. |
| 750, | for reverse telephoto lenses with eight components. |
| 754, | for more than seven multiple component lenses. |
|
| | |
| 682 | Having seven or less components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 680. Subject matter wherein the reverse telephoto lens comprises
seven or less sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series
along the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact, or in spaced parallel relation
with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not
enter into the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643+, | for eyepieces having seven or less components. |
| 648+, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having seven or less components. |
| 657+, | for microscope objectives having seven or less components. |
| 708+, | for nonspherical surface variable magnification
lenses having seven or less components. |
| 733+, | for seven or less multiple component lenses with
reflecting element. |
| 745+, | for telephoto lenses having seven or less components. |
| 751+, | for wide angle lenses having seven or less components. |
| 755+, | for multiple component lenses having seven or less
components. |
| 796+, | for a single component with multiple elements. |
|
| | |
| 683 | With mechanical compensation: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter wherein the lens includes at least a first
lens group including a variator movable for varying the focal length
and at least a second lens group including a compensator which moves
independently of the first group for compensating for image plane
deviation during focal length variation.
| | (1)
Note. A group is an assembly of one or more components
used as a single unit to achieve a particular function such as focussing, variating, compensating, or relaying. |
| | (2)
Note. Focusing is the action of converging light
beams to a minimum size spot of light. |
| | (3)
Note. Relaying is the action of transferring an
input light beam from a relay to another device without effecting
any change between the relay input and output light beam. |
| | (4)
Note. A component consists of either (1) a
single optical piece (i.e., element) comprising
a single transparent mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting
surfaces, which surfaces are disposed transversely of the
optical axis of the lens and spaced therealong or (2) a plurality
of such masses arranged in series along the optical axis of the
lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either in full overall
contact, or in spaced parallel relation with the spacing
being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into the lens
computations. | |
| | |
| 686 | Four groups: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 683. Subject matter wherein four groups move independently of
each other and at least two at the groups function respectively
as a variator, movable for varing the local length, and
a compensator which moves independently of the first group for compensating
for image plane deviation during focal length variation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 689+, | for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having three groups. |
| 691+, | for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having two groups. |
|
| | |
| 687 | +-++ Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 686. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent groups, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the left most sign representing the group
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of the light travelling through the lens is the same as
the reading arrangement of the subclass title. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 774, | for a +-++ arrangement
in general multiple component lens having four components. |
|
| | |
| 688 | +- -+ Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 686. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent groups, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the left most sign representing the group
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as the
reading arrangement of the subclass title. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 775, | for a +- -+ arrangement
in general multiple component lens having four components. |
|
| | |
| 689 | Three groups: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 683. Subject matter wherein three groups move independently of
each other and at least two of the groups function respectively
as (1) a variator movable of varying the focal
length and (2) a compensator which moves independently
of the first group for compensating for image plane deviation focal
length variation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 686+, | for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having four groups. |
| 691+, | for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having two groups. |
|
| | |
| 690 | +-+ Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 689. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent groups, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the left most sign representing the group
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as the
reading arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 691 | Two groups: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 683. Subject matter wherein two groups move independently of
each other and these groups function respectively as (1) a
variator movable for varying the focal length and (2) a
compensator which moves independently of the first group for compensating
for image plane deviation during focal length variation.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 686+, | for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having four groups. |
| 689+, | for mechanical compensation with variable magnification
having three groups. |
|
| | |
| 692 | +- Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 691. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens groups, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the left most sign representing the group
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the
direction of light travelling through the lens is the same as the
reading arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 693 | With macro-type focusing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 683. Subject matter wherein the mechanical compensation permits
focusing at very close object distances without loss of definition
and without the need for front or rear attachments. |
| | |
| 694 | Adjusting mechanism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 676. Subject matter comprising structure for changing the axial
spacing between components of the lens.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for the mechanical
adjusting structure. Where the optical relationship is
set forth in the claims, classification is in subclasses 676-693. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 823+, | for mechanisms that axially shift the lens components
to axially adjust the focal plane of the lens. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 396, | Photography,
subclasses 72+ for mechanisms that axially shift the components
of the lens of a camera to accomplish a variation in the equivalent
focal length of such lens and camera structure. |
|
| | |
| 696 | Motor driven: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 694. Subject matter wherein the adjusting mechanism includes
an engine to power any required adjustment. |
| | |
| 698 | Auto focusing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 697. Subject matter wherein the condition that is responded to
is changing of focal point. |
| | |
| 699 | Having cam device: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 694. Subject matter wherein the adjusting mechanism includes
a curved surface that causes changes in movement. |
| | |
| 703 | With specified mount: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 694. Subject matter wherein the axial spacing between lens components
is adjusted and the structure to hold the components in place is specified. |
| | |
| 704 | Having detail of barrel: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 703. Subject matter wherein the specified mount includes specifies
of the cylindrical case which holds the lens components in position. |
| | |
| 705 | With macro type focusing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 694. Subject matter wherein the adjusting mechanism permits focusing
at very close object distances without loss of definition and without the
need for front or rear attachments. |
| | |
| 707 | Diffusing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens produces an image having
soft or indistinct outlines.
| | (1)
Note. The lens diffusion characteristics may be
effected by any one of the following: (a) frosting
the lens surface, (b) shifting the lens
components relative to each other, (c) placing
aspheric surfaces adjacent or on one or more components of the lens, (d) adding
a transparent plate or additional lens component to the lens, (e) undercorrecting
the lens, (f) introducing aberration
to the lens, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 601+, | for glare-reducing optical systems. |
|
| | |
| 708 | Including a nonspherical surface: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein at least one of the refracting surfaces
of the lens departs from a spherical shape.
| | (1)
Note. One or more of the components of the lens
may be formed of symmetrically refracting prisms. |
| | (2)
Note. The surfaces here are continuous curves and
may be aspheric. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 668+, | for anamorphic lenses having cylindrical components
which magnify more in one plane than in another plane at an angle
thereto, particularly subclass 669 for such lenses in which at
least one of the components is formed of prisms whereby the lens has
a different magnification in one plane from that which it has in
a plane at right angles to the first mentioned plane. |
| 678, | for lenses wherein at least one component of the
lens is formed of symmetrically refracting prisms which are rotatable
about axes that are parallel to their refracting edges to vary the power
of the lens. |
| 725, | for panoramic lenses. |
| 728, | for lenses having nonspherical reflecting surfaces. |
| 742, | for echelon lenses. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclasses 37+ for methods of lens making and subclass 61 for
methods of shaping glass surfaces. |
| 102, | Ammunition and Explosives,
subclasses 200+ for toroidal lenses combined with fuses, primers, and
igniting devices utilizing radiation energy. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 159.41 through 159.48for spectacle lenses having refracting surfaces
which depart from the spherical form. |
|
| | |
| 709 | Conical: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein the nonspherical surface has a shape
bounded by a closed planar base and the surface formed by connecting
line segments between every point on the perimeter of this base
with a common point. |
| | |
| 710 | Cylindrical: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein the nonspherical lens surface has
a shape bounded by two parallel planes and a surface generated by
a line tracing a closed curve where the line is parallel to an initial
position. |
| | |
| 711 | Toroidal: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein the nonspherical lens surface has
a shape generated by the revolution of any closed plane curve about
a nonintersecting axis lying in its plane. |
| | |
| 712 | Paraboloidal: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein the nonspherical lens surface has
a shape formed by revolving about an axis of symmetry a set of points
equally distant from a fixed point and a fixed line. |
| | |
| 713 | Having six components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises six sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 649, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 658, | for microscope objectives having six components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 745, | for telephoto lenses having more than five components. |
| 752, | for wide angle lenses having six components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 756, | for multiple component lens having six components. |
|
| | |
| 714 | Having five components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises five sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 649, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 659, | for microscope objectives having five components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 746, | for telephoto lenses having five components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 763, | for multiple component lenses having five components. |
|
| | |
| 715 | Having four components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 644, | for eyepieces having four components. |
| 650, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components. |
| 660, | for microscope objective having four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 734, | for four component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 747, | for a telephoto lens having four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 771, | for multiple component lenses having four components. |
|
| | |
| 716 | Having three components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises three sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series along
the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 645, | for eyepieces having three components. |
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 735, | for three component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 784, | for multiple component lenses having three components. |
|
| | |
| 717 | Having two components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises two sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 646, | for eyepieces having two components. |
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 736, | for two component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 793, | for multiple component lenses having two components. |
|
| | |
| 718 | Having one component: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 708. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises one section (i.e., component), containing
two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the optical axis
of the lens with their optical centers in alignment thereon, their
planes perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme refracting
surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that parallel light rays
upon entering and passing through all of such component is refracted
to a focus no more than one time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 647, | for eyepieces having one component. |
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 726+, | for a single component lens with a reflecting element. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 796, | for a single component lens with multiple elements. |
|
| | |
| 720 | Asymmetric (e.g., prismatic
or eccentric, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the center of mass of the lens is
laterally spaced from the optical axis of the lens.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for both prismatic
lenses which have at least one component formed with a wedge prism or
the equivalent thereof between its opposed refracting surfaces, and
eccentric lenses in which at least one component is formed as a
segment of a symmetrical lens. |
| | (2)
Note. A substantial portion of the lenses under
this definition are for mounting on automobile windshields to facilitate viewing
of traffic lights by the operator of the automobile. | |
| | |
| 721 | Plural focal length: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens has a plurality of light
transmitting zones or areas of different focal lengths.
| | (1)
Note. This subject matter includes the lens plus
means to exclude light from passing through certain areas or zones while
permitting light to pass through other zones or areas of the lens
whereby a selection of focal length is provided. |
| | (2)
Note. See subclass 745 - (2) Note
for the definition of focal length. | |
| | |
| 722 | Selective wavelength transmitting or blocking: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter where the lens or structure combined with
the lens exhibits spectrally differential transmission.
| | (1)
Note. In the lenses of this and the indented subclass
the means which gives the lens its particular light-transmitting properties
may be either an integral part of the lens, i.e., the
particular material from which the lens and the components are made, or
a separate plate having opposed parallel plane surface disposed transversely
of the optical axis of the lens, such plate being formed
of a material which favors or hinders light transmission in a selected
area of the spectrum more than it does in any other area of the
spectrum. |
| | (2)
Note. The term spectrum as employed in this definition
refers to light having wavelengths between 3850 and 7600 angstrom
units, that is, visible light. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 350+, | for lenses having significant characteristics in
the infrared or ultraviolet spectrum. |
| 885+, | for light filters, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correction,
subclasses 159.6 through 159.65for spectacle lenses with light-filtering
means. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclass 317 for refractors in the form of lenses not otherwise
classified. |
|
| | |
| 724 | Annular zonal correcting: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises one or more annular
components which are used either to correct aberrations present
in an annular zone of the lens or of another lens or to increase
the depth of focus of either lens.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass provides for both the combination
of the lens being corrected and its annular correcting lens for the
annular correcting lens, per se. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 741, | for lenses with multipart elements. |
|
| | |
| 725 | Panoramic: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens is capable of receiving
light rays from the entire horizon simultaneously and producing
from such rays a single image of the entire horizon.
| | (1)
Note. The lens must be capable of receiving light
rays from all portions of the entire horizon simultaneously.
See this class, subclass 726 for lenses combined with a
reflecting means for sequentially directing rays from fractional
portions of the horizon through the lens, but which cannot
receive rays from the entire horizon simultaneously. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 504, | for lenses maintained in an extended spacing structure
to provide a wide field of view. |
| 749, | and 754, for lenses having a particularly
wide field of view, but less than the requirement of the
above definition. |
|
| | |
| 726 | With reflecting element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens system includes a reflective
surface transverse to the light path.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 503+, | for extended spacing structure employing diverse
refractive and reflective elements. |
|
| | |
| 727 | Including concave or convex reflecting surface: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 726. Subject matter wherein the lens system includes a transparent
refractive element and a curved reflective surface which coact to
provide a single lens of both refractive and reflective components, i.e., a
catadioptric lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 364+, | for lenses having both refracting and reflecting
components combined with an ocular or viewing system. |
| 838, | for reflectors and reflecting systems. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 744+ for catadioptric lenses combined with cathode-ray
tubes. |
| 396, | Photography, appropriate subclasses for catadioptric lenses combined
with significant camera structure. |
|
| | |
| 728 | With aspheric surface (e.g., Schmidt
lens, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 727. Subject matter in which one of the refracting or reflecting
surfaces departs from the spherical shape (e.g., a
Schmidt type lens).
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 364+, | for catadioptric lenses combined with an ocular
or viewing system. |
| 708+, | for other aspheric-type lens. |
|
| | |
| 730 | Reflectors in series: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 727. Subject matter where the lens system includes a second reflector
receiving light rays reflected by a first reflector.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 503+, | for extended spacing structure employing diverse
refractive and reflective elements. |
|
| | |
| 733 | Multiple component lenses: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 726. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises multiple sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643+, | for eyepieces having multiple components. |
| 648+, | for projection type field curvature shaping lens
having multiple components. |
| 656+, | for microscope objective having multiple components. |
| 680+, | for reverse telephoto lens of variable focal lengths. |
| 708+, | for a nonspherical lens having multiple components. |
| 745+, | for telephoto lens having multiple components. |
| 749+, | for reverse telephoto lens having multiple components. |
| 754+, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
|
| | |
| 734 | Four components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 733. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 644, | for eyepieces having four components. |
| 650, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components. |
| 660, | for microscope objective having four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 715, | for nonspherical lens system having four components. |
| 747, | for a telephoto lens having four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 771, | for multiple component lenses having four components. |
|
| | |
| 735 | Three components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 733. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises three sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 645, | for eyepieces having three components. |
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 716, | for nonspherical lens system having three components. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 784, | for multiple component lenses having three components. |
|
| | |
| 736 | Two components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 733. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises two sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 646, | for eyepieces having two components. |
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 717, | for nonspherical lens system having two components. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 793, | for multiple component lenses having two components. |
|
| | |
| 737 | With diverse refracting element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens is combined with a nonlens
light-refracting element through which element the light
must pass during the normal operation of the lens.
| | (1)
Note. The refracting element is employed to redirect
the optical axis of the lens (e.g., prisms). |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 503+, | for extended spacing structure employing diverse
refractive light deflectors. |
| 669, | for amorphous refracting elements in the form of
prisms. |
|
| | |
| 738 | With light limiting or controlling means: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter comprising the combination of a lens and
means associated therewith to limit or control, without
regard to wavelength, the amount of intensity of the light
that passes through the lens.
| | (1)
Note. The subject matter under this definition includes
lamina between lens elements, coatings on the faces of
elements, and pigment in the material of the lens elements
themselves, all of which do not favor the transmission
of any one particular wavelength of light over any other wavelength
present in the light. |
| | (2)
Note. This class (359) provides
for optical diaphragms and shutters, per se, in subclasses
227+. Lenses combined with shutters generally
are provided for in subclass 738 and lens combined with diaphragms
generally are in indented subclass 739. However, camera
shutters and diaphragms, per se, are classified
in Class 396, Photography, subclasses 452+ and
505+ respectively, the indicated use in cameras
or camera background being sufficient for classification there as opposed
to Class 359. Class 396 also provides for lenses broadly
or specifically combined with camera shutter or diaphragm details, it
being emphasized that such combinations involving noncamera shutters
or diaphragms are classified in subclasses 738+ of this
class (359) as indicated above. The
combination of a lens broadly or specifically claimed and a camera
shutter or diaphragm broadly claimed (as well as shutters
or diaphragms generally) are classified in this subclass (738).
Projectors with shutters or diaphragms are provided for in Class
353, Optics: Image Projectors, subclasses
75, 88+, and 97. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 227+, | for means to control the intensity or amount of
light that passes along a certain path. See also (2) Note
above. |
| 611, | for barrel end or lens mount shade to prevent glare
or to reduce unwanted nonimaging light. |
| 722, | for a lens with means which favors the transmission
or blocking of particular wavelengths of light. |
| 888, | for means to control the density of light flow through
a predetermined area without regard to the wavelength of the light. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 88+ for an image projector having a shutter. |
| 396, | Photography,
subclasses 452+ for camera shutters, and see (2) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 739 | Diaphragm: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 738. Subject matter in which the light-controlling means
is in the form of an opaque screen having a variable aperture therein, such
screen being disposed in the path of the light beam passing through
the lens in such a position axially of the lens to either restrict
the amount of light that reaches the lens or restrict the amount of
light transmitted by the lens.
| | (1)
Note. The subject matter under this definition includes
opaque screens in which the aperture is of annular shape and located
either within the screen or at the periphery thereof. |
| | (2)
Note. Mere recitation of a diaphragm is inadequate
for classification here. This subclass and subclass 740
are limited to special shapes or locations of diaphragms. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclass 75 and 97 for an image projector having a diaphragm. |
| 396, | Photography,
subclasses 505+ for camera diaphragms, and see (2) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 741 | With multipart element: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein a lens element is formed of a plurality
of elements arranged side by side, transverse to the optical
axis, and cooperating to form a single image.
| | (1)
Note. The subject matter under this definition differs
from the subject matter provided for in subclasses 754+ in
that the various parts of the component or element in subclasses
754+ are in series along the optical axis of the component or
element, while the various parts of the component or element
of this subclass are in edge to edge relation, transversely of
the optical axis. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 619+, | for lenticular lenses where each element forms a
spatially separate image of a single element. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 126, | Stoves and Furnaces,
subclass 698 for lenses employed in solar heating. |
|
| | |
| 742 | Echelon (e.g., Fresnel
lens, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 741. Subject matter wherein at least one of the refracting surfaces
of the lens is discontinuous, being formed of a plurality
of stepped refracting surfaces connecting at their adjacent edges by
other surfaces which extend substantially parallel to the intended
direction of light travel through the lens, the surfaces
being so shaped and arranged that they form in conjunction with
the opposed refracting surface of the lens, a plurality
of lenses all of which have a common focus. |
| | |
| 744 | Afocal (e.g., Galilean
telescopes, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the components of the lens are so
shaped and spaced along the optical axis of the lens that the total
refracting power of the lens is zero, i.e., parallel
light rays, upon entering the lens and passing through
all components thereof are so refracted that they emerge from the
lens as parallel rays.
| | (1)
Note. These lenses may be attachments to be used
with other lenses to change the equivalent focal lengths of the
latter lenses. | |
| | |
| 745 | Telephoto: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens is designed with the effective
focal length equal to or greater than the distance from the first
refracting surface to the focal plane.
| | (1)
Note. This lens system is physically shorter than
its rated focal length. |
| | (2)
Note. The focal length is the distance from the
principle focus (focus of parallel rays of light) to
the surface of a mirror or the optical center of a lens. |
| | (3)
Note. A focal point is the point at which a lens
or mirror will focus parallel incident radiation. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643+, | for eyepieces. |
| 648+, | for projection type field curvature shaping lens. |
| 656+, | for microscope objective. |
| 672, | for selective magnification. |
| 676, | for variable magnification. |
| 680+, | for reverse telephoto lens. |
| 708+, | for a nonspherical lens. |
| 733+, | for multiple component lenses having a reflecting
element. |
| 749+, | for reverse telephoto lens. |
| 754+, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
|
| | |
| 746 | With five components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 745. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises five sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 648, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 659, | for microscope objectives having five components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 714, | for nonspherical surface lens system having five
components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 763, | for multiple component lenses having five components. |
|
| | |
| 747 | With four components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 745. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 644, | for eyepieces having four components. |
| 650, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components. |
| 660, | for microscope objective having four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 715, | for nonspherical lens system having four components. |
| 734, | for four component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 771, | for multiple component lenses having four components. |
|
| | |
| 748 | With less than four components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 745. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises less than four
sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 645+, | for eyepieces having three or less components. |
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 716+, | for nonspherical lens system having three or less
components. |
| 735+, | for three or less component multiple component lenses
with a reflecting element. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 784+, | for multiple component lenses having three or less
components. |
| 796, | for a single component lens with multiple elements. |
|
| | |
| 749 | Reverse telephoto: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens is designed with the effective
focal length equal to or less than the distance from the last refracting
surface to the focal plane, i.e., the
back focal length is equal to or greater than the effective focal
length.
| | (1)
Note. This is also known as a retrofocus lens and
it consists of an ordinary objective with a negative component near
its focal point, thus forming a large back focus relative
to its focal length. |
| | (2)
Note. The focal length is the distance from the
principle focus (focus of parallel rays of light) to
the surface of a mirror or the optical center of a lens. |
| | (3)
Note. A focal point is the point at which a lens
or mirror will focus parallel incident radiation. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643+, | for eyepieces. |
| 648+, | for projection type field curvature shaping lens. |
| 656+, | for microscope objective. |
| 680+, | for reverse telephoto lens of variable focal lengths. |
| 708+, | for a nonspherical lens. |
| 733+, | for multiple component lenses having a reflecting
element. |
| 745+, | for telephoto lens. |
| 754+, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
|
| | |
| 750 | With eight components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 749. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises eight sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 648, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 656, | for microscope objective having more than seven
components. |
| 681, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
eight components. |
| 708, | for nonspherical surface variable magnification
lenses having more than six components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 745, | for telephoto lenses having more than five components. |
| 754, | for more than seven multiple component lenses. |
|
| | |
| 751 | With seven components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 749. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises seven sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such, axis
and their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the
optical axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing
through all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than
one time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 648, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 657, | for microscope objectives having seven components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 708, | for nonspherical surface variable magnification
lenses having more than six components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 745, | for telephoto lenses having more than five components. |
| 755, | for multiple component lenses having seven components. |
|
| | |
| 752 | With six components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 749. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises six sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| |
(3) Note. The axial dimension
of the air-spacing between either the opposed surfaces
of the single mass "component" or the axially
extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped plurality
of masses, and the other adjacent refracting surfaces that
may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude to enter into
the lens computations in order to limit the axial extent of the
lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 648, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 658, | for microscope objectives having six components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 713, | for nonspherical surface lens system having six
components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 745, | for telephoto lenses having more than five components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 756, | for multiple component lens having six components. |
|
| | |
| 753 | With five or less components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 749. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises five or less sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643+, | for eyepieces having five or less components. |
| 648+, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having five or less components. |
| 659+, | for microscope objectives having five or less components. |
| 682+, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
five or less components. |
| 714+, | for nonspherical surface lens system having five
or less components. |
| 733+, | for five or less multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 746+, | for telephoto lenses having five or less components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
| 763+, | for multiple component lenses having five or less
components. |
| 796, | for a single component lens with multiple elements. |
|
| | |
| 754 | Multiple component lenses: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises multiple sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643+, | for eyepieces having multiple components. |
| 648+, | for projection type field curvature shaping lens
having multiple components. |
| 656+, | for microscope objective having multiple components. |
| 680+, | for reverse telephoto lens of variable focal length. |
| 708+, | for a nonspherical lens having multiple components. |
| 733+, | for multiple component lenses having a reflecting
element. |
| 745+, | for telephoto lens having multiple components. |
| 749+, | for reverse telephoto lens having multiple components. |
|
| | |
| 755 | Seven components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises seven sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 648, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 657, | for microscope objectives having seven components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 708, | for nonspherical surface variable magnification
lenses having more than six components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 745, | for telephoto lenses having more than five components. |
| 751, | for wide angle lenses having seven components. |
|
| | |
| 756 | Six components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises six sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 648, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 658, | for microscope objectives having six components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 713, | for nonspherical surface lens system having six
components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 745, | for telephoto lenses having more than five components. |
| 752, | for wide angle lenses having six components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
|
| | |
| 757 | First component positive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 756. Subject matter wherein the component at the entrant face
of the lens, i.e., the first
component hit by the light as the light begins travelling through
the lens, is a convergent lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 757+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 759+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first two components are positive(i.e., convergent). |
| 764+, | for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 767+, | for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 772+, | for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., convergent). |
|
| | |
| 758 | + - + + - + Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 757. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the left most sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 759 | First two components positive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 757. Subject matter wherein the first two components at the entrant
face of the lens, i.e., the first
two components hit by the light as the light begins travelling through
the lens, are convergent lenses.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 757+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first com-ponent is positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 764+, | for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 767+, | for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 772+, | for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., convergent). |
|
| | |
| 760 | + + - - + + Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 759. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 761 | First component negative: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 756. Subject matter wherein the first component at the entrant
face of the lens, i.e., the
first component hit by the light as the light begins travelling
through the lens, is divergent.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 770, | for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first component is negative. |
| 781+, | for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first component is negative. |
|
| | |
| 762 | First two components negative: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 761. Subject matter wherein the first two components at the entrant
face of the lens, i.e., the first
two components hit by the light as the light begins travelling through
the lens, are divergent lenses. |
| | |
| 763 | Five components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises five sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces arranged in series along the
optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 643, | for eyepieces having more than four components. |
| 648, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having more than four components. |
| 659, | for microscope objectives having five components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 714, | for nonspherical surface lens system having five
components. |
| 733, | for more than four multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 746, | for telephoto lenses having five components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
|
| | |
| 764 | First component positive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 763. Subject matter wherein the component at the entrant face
of the lens, i.e., the first
component hit by the light as the light begins travelling through
the lens, is a convergent lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 757+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 759+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 767+, | for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 772+, | for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., conver-gent). |
|
| | |
| 765 | + - - + +Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 764. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 766 | + - + - + Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 764. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 767 | First two components positive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 764. Subject matter wherein the first two components at the entrant
face of the lens, i.e., the first
two components hit by the light as the light begins travelling through
the lens, are convergent lenses.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 757+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 759+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., conver-gent). |
| 764+, | for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 772+, | for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., convergent). |
|
| | |
| 768 | + + - - +Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 767. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 769 | + + - + + Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 767. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 770 | First component negative: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 763. Subject matter wherein the first component at the entrant
face of the lens, i.e., the
first component hit by the light as the light begins travelling
through the lens, is divergent.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 761+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is negative. |
| 781+, | for a multiple component lens having four components
wherein the first component is negative. |
|
| | |
| 771 | Four components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises four sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series along
the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis and their
axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 644, | for eyepieces having four components. |
| 650, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having four components. |
| 660, | for microscope objective having four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 715, | for nonspherical lens system having four components. |
| 734, | for four component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 747, | for a telephoto lens having four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
|
| | |
| 772 | First component positive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 771. Subject matter wherein the component at the entrant face
of the lens, i.e., the first
component hit by the light as the light begins travelling through
the lens, is a convergent lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 757+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 759+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 764+, | for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first component is positive (i.e., convergent). |
| 767+, | for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first two components are positive (i.e., conver-gent). |
|
| | |
| 773 | + - + - Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 772. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 774 | + - + + Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 772. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 687, | for a + - + + arrangement
in a mechanical compensation variable magnification lens. |
|
| | |
| 775 | + - - + Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 772. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 688, | for a + - - + arrangement
in a mechanical compensation variable magnification lens. |
|
| | |
| 776 | With multiple element component: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 775. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises a single section (i.e., component) having
a plurality of optical pieces (i.e., elements) arranged in
laminated series along the light path or optical axis of the lens
with their adjacent refracting surfaces either in full overall contact
or so closely spaced that such spacing does not enter into the lens
computations.
| | (1)
Note. Each "component" contains
two refractive surfaces, arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment thereon, their
planes perpendicular to such axis and their axially extreme refracting
surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that parallel light rays
upon entering and passing through all of such components are refracted
to a focus no more than one time. |
| | (2)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact, or in spaced parallel relation
with the spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not
enter into the lens computations. |
| | (3)
Note. The "component" two refracting surfaces
of the single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces
of the plurality of masses, have at least a portion thereof
axially air-spaced from all other adjacent refracting surfaces
that may be present in the lens. |
| | (4)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
| | (5)
Note. The term "element" as applied
to a lens designates any single transparent mass of refractive material
having two opposed refracting surfaces, which surfaces
are disposed transversely of the optical axis of the lens and spaced
therealong, i.e., any one of
the masses in the above component definition regardless of its spacing
from adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 355, | for lenses constructed of materials that transmit
ultraviolet and infrared light. |
| 724, | for lenses with annular zonal correcting elements. |
| 741, | for lenses with multipart elements or components. |
| 786, | for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the first component contains multiple elements. |
| 787, | for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the second component contains multiple elements. |
| 788, | for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the third component contains multiple elements. |
| 796, | for a lens having a single component with multiple
elements. |
| 797, | for a lens having a single component with three
or more elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclasses 37+ for processes of securing lens elements together. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 159.01+ for opthalmic lenses or blanks. |
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
subclasses 415 , 417, and 426+ for a
nonstructural stock material product in the form of a composite web
or sheet embodying a layer of glass or quartz next to another layer
of material which may also be quartz or glass (subclasses
427 and 428). |
|
| | |
| 777 | Infinite radius: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 776. Subject matter wherein at least one mass of refractive material
has at least one flat surface perpendicular to an optical axis. |
| | |
| 778 | Having a biconvex single element component: |
| | Subject matter under 776 wherein at least one element consists
of a single mass of refracting material having a curved or rounded
outward surface at the entrance and exit ends.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 789, | for a three component lens having a first biconvex
component in the + - + component arrangement. |
| 790, | for a three component lens having a third biconvex
component in the + - + component arrangement. |
|
| | |
| 779 | + + - + Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 772. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 780 | + + + - Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 772. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 781 | First component negative: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 771. Subject matter wherein the first component at the entrant
face of the lens, i.e., the
first component hit by the light as the light begins travelling
through the lens, is divergent.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 761+, | for a multiple component lens having six components
wherein the first component is negative. |
| 770, | for a multiple component lens having five components
wherein the first component is negative. |
|
| | |
| 782 | - + + - Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 781. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 783 | - + + + Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 781. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 784 | Three components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises three sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series along
the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 645, | for eyepieces having three components. |
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 716, | for nonspherical lens system having three components. |
| 735, | for three component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
|
| | |
| 785 | +-+ Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 784. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 786 | With multiple element first component: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 785. Subject matter wherein the first convergent component contains
multiple masses of refractive material; each mass having
two opposed refracting surfaces disposed transversely of the optical
axis of the lens and spaced therealong.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 741, | for lenses with multipart elements or components. |
| 776, | for a four component multiple component lens wherein
the first + component contains multiple elements. |
| 787, | for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the second component contains multiple elements. |
| 788, | for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the third component contains multiple elements. |
| 796, | for a lens having a single component with multiple
elements. |
| 797, | for a lens having a single component with three
or more elements. |
|
| | |
| 787 | With multiple element second component: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 785. Subject matter wherein the second divergent component contains
multiple masses of refractive material; each mass having
two opposed refracting surfaces disposed transversely of the optical
axis of the lens and spaced therealong.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 741, | for lenses with multipart elements or components. |
| 776, | for a four component multiple component lens wherein
the first + component contains multiple elements. |
| 786, | for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the first component contains multiple elements. |
| 788, | for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the third component contains multiple elements. |
| 796, | for a lens having a single component with multiple
elements. |
| 797, | for a lens having a single component with three
or more elements. |
|
| | |
| 788 | With multiple element third component: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 785. Subject matter wherein the third convergent component contains
multiple masses of refractive material; each mass having
two opposed refracting surfaces disposed transversely of the optical
axis of the lens and spaced therealong.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 741, | for lenses with multipart elements or components. |
| 776, | for a four component multiple component lens wherein
the first + component contains multiple elements. |
| 786, | for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the first component contains multiple elements. |
| 787, | for a three component multiple component lens wherein
the second component contains multiple elements. |
| 796, | for a lens having a single component with multiple
elements. |
| 797, | for a lens having a single component with three
or more elements. |
|
| | |
| 789 | With first component biconvex: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 785. Subject matter wherein the first convergent component has
a curved or rounded outward surface at the entrance and exit ends.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 778, | for a four component lens having a single biconvex
element in the + - - + component
arrangement. |
| 790, | for a three component lens having a third biconvex
component in the + - + component arrangement. |
|
| | |
| 790 | With third component biconvex: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 785. Subject matter wherein the third convergent component has
a curved or rounded outward surface at the entrance and exit ends.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 778, | for a four component lens having a single biconvex
element in the + - - + component
arrangement. |
| 789, | for a three component lens having a first biconvex
component in the + - + component arrangement. |
|
| | |
| 791 | ++- Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 784. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 792 | +++ Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 784. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 793 | Two components: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 754. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises two sections (i.e., components), each
containing two refractive surfaces, arranged in series along
the optical axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment
thereon, their planes perpendicular to such axis, and
their axially extreme refracting surfaces so spaced along the optical
axis that parallel light rays upon entering and passing through
all of such components are refracted to a focus no more than one
time.
| | (1)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (2)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (3)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 646, | for eyepieces having two components. |
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 717, | for nonspherical lens system having two components. |
| 736, | for two component multiple component lenses with
a reflecting element. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
| 754, | for multiple component lens systems generally. |
|
| | |
| 794 | ++ Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 793. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 795 | +- Arrangement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 793. Subject matter wherein the plus and minus signs indicate
convergent and divergent lens components, respectively.
| | (1)
Note. The arrangement along the optical axis of
the lens is identified by the leftmost sign representing the component
at the entrant face of the lens, i.e., the direction
of light travelling through the lens is the same as the reading
arrangement of the subclass title. | |
| | |
| 796 | Single component with multiple elements: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens comprises a single section (i.e., component) having
a plurality of optical pieces (i.e., elements) arranged in
laminated series along the light path or optical axis of the lens
with their adjacent refracting surfaces either in full overall contact
or so closely spaced that such spacing does not enter into the lens
computations.
| | (1)
Note. Each "component" contains
two refractive surfaces, arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their optical centers in alignment thereon, their
planes perpendicular to such axis, and their axially extreme refracting
surfaces so spaced along the optical axis that parallel light rays
upon entering and passing through all of such components are refracted
to a focus no more than one time. |
| | (2)
Note. The term "component" as
applied to a lens designates either (1) a single transparent
mass of refractive material having two opposed refracting surfaces or (2) a
grouped plurality of such masses arranged in series along the optical
axis of the lens with their adjacent refracting surfaces either
in full overall contact or in spaced parallel relation with the
spacing being of such small magnitude that it does not enter into
the lens computations. |
| | (3)
Note. The two refractive surfaces of a "component" comprising
a single mass or the two axially extreme refracting surfaces of
a "component" comprising a plurality of masses
have at least a portion thereof axially air-spaced from
all other adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the
lens. |
| | (4)
Note. The axial dimension of the air-spacing
between either the opposed surfaces of the single mass "component" or the
axially extreme surfaces of the "component" grouped
plurality of masses, and the other adjacent refracting
surfaces that may be present in the lens must be of sufficient magnitude
to enter into the lens computations in order to limit the axial
extent of the lens component. |
| | (5)
Note. The term "element" as applied
to a lens designates any single transparent mass of refractive material
having two opposed refracting surfaces, which surfaces
are disposed transversely of the optical axis of the lens and spaced
therealong, i.e., any one of
the masses in the above component definition regardless of its spacing
from adjacent refracting surfaces that may be present in the lens. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 355, | for lenses constructed of materials that transmit
ultraviolet and infrared light. |
| 647, | for eyepieces having one component. |
| 651, | for projection type field curvature shaping lenses
having less than four components. |
| 661, | for microscope objective having less than four components. |
| 682, | for variable magnification reverse telephoto having
seven or less components. |
| 718, | for nonspherical lens system having one component. |
| 724, | for lenses with annular zonal correcting elements. |
| 741, | for lenses with multipart elements or components. |
| 748, | for a telephoto lens having less than four components. |
| 753, | for wide angle lenses having five or less components. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclass 387 for processes of forming an optical fiber directly
connected to a lens; subclasses 37+ for processes
of securing glass lens elements together. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 159.01+ for opthalmic lenses or blanks. |
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles,
subclasses 415 , 417, and 426+ for a
nonstructural stock material product in the form of a composite web
or sheet embodying a layer of glass or quartz next to another layer
of material which may also be quartz or glass (subclasses
427 and 428). |
|
| | |
| 797 | Three or more elements: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 796. Subject matter wherein the single component of the lens
is made up of three or more masses of refractive material; each
having two opposed refracting surfaces, which surfaces
are disposed transversely of the optical axis of the lens and spaced
therealong. |
| | |
| 798 | With viewed object or viewed field illumination: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter including a light source for illuminating
the area viewed through or covered by the lens, or including
structure such as a reflector or a prism for directing natural or
artificial light on the area viewed, or wherein the lens
is adapted to collect and direct natural or artificial light on
the area viewed or covered.
| | (1)
Note. A mere transparent or exposed portion is not
sufficient for classification here. A light source or
light directing or guiding means is necessary. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 385+, | for compound lens system spacing means with object
illumination. |
| 591+, | for natural light directing systems. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 362, | Illumination,
subclass 253 for lights combined with structure not otherwise classifiable; and
subclasses 257-311, especially subclasses 268
and 311.01-311.15, for projectors
which may include focusing lenses in the light path. |
|
| | |
| 799 | Illuminating beam coaxial with lens axis: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 798. Subject matter wherein the axis of the illuminating beam
is parallel with the optical axis of the lens over at least a part
of these axes.
| | (1)
Note. The beam may pass through the lens or the
beam may have an annular cross section and surround the lens; however, the
beam axis and lens axis are coincident. Most of the art
in this subclass relates to a microscope objective and the illuminating
structure for the viewed object. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 385+, | for microscope stages with substage illumination, the
beam usually being coaxial with the barrel. |
|
| | |
| 800 | Illumination through lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 798. Subject matter wherein at least part of the illumination
passes through at least part of the lens or through at least one
component of a multiple component lens. |
| | |
| 801 | With viewed object support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 798. Subject matter wherein an object which is being viewed through
the lens is supported by a device which is connected to the lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 811, | for lenses combined with supports for viewed objects
generally. |
|
| | |
| 802 | Magnifier: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 798. Subject matter wherein the lens makes an enlarged image
of a viewed object. |
| | |
| 803 | Hand held: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 802. Subject matter wherein the device is held in a human hand
while in use. |
| | |
| 804 | With viewed object support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter including structure for supporting an object
to be viewed in the optical path of the lens.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 801, | for lenses combined with viewed object supports
and including illumination of the viewed object. |
| 811+, | for lens supports generally. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, appropriate subclasses for lenses broadly combined with
supports for cards, pictures, or signs.
See also (1) Note under
subclass 806 . |
|
| | |
| 805 | On lens supporting handle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 804. Subject matter including a lens supporting handle which
also functions as a support for the object being viewed or which
supports structure which in turn supports the object being viewed.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 803, | and 812, for lenses with handles generally. |
|
| | |
| 806 | Relatively movable informatory sheet and lens (e.g., reading
machine, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 804. Subject matter including structure for supporting a sheet
or tape of printed, pictorial, or other informatory
matter together with structure for moving or guiding movement of
the sheet or tape horizontally relative to the lens, or
of the lens horizontally relative to the sheet or tape for viewing
different portions of the sheet or tape.
| | (1)
Note. Class 40, Card, Picture, or
Sign Exhibiting, provides for the combination of a lens
broadly together with structure for supporting a card, picture, or
sign relative to the lens for viewing therethrough. However, where
the claims recite any optical limitations such as lens shape or
forcing (as by an adjustable lens support) together
with a sheet or tape support as defined above classification is in
this subclass (806). Where the supporting
structure presents only a portion of a line of printed matter or
an entire line or limited number of lines together with provision
for moving additional lines or line portions into lens view, the lens
being only broadly claimed as in optical reading machines classification
is in this subclass (806). Where the
lens broadly claimed is only utilized to examine or view a portion
of the exhibit, there being relative movement between the lens
and the exhibit classification is here in this subclass (806).
Class 40 provides generally for viewing the entire single exhibit (or
the entire framed portion of an exhibit which is presented for viewing
as in map holders) of the card, sign or picture
through the lens, with provision for changing the entire
exhibit as in subclasses 446+ thereunder. Magnifiers adapted
for attachment to a sheet for viewing a portion thereof are classified under
subclass 804 of this class or in this subclass (806), if
relative motion is provided, regardless whether the lens
is claimed broadly or specifically. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 466+, | for stereoscopic viewers. |
| 801, | for lenses relatively movable with respect to sheets
and tapes together with illumination of the sheet or tape. |
| 813, | for lenses movable in the lens plane. |
| 823, | for lens mountings with axial adjustment as for
focusing. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 40, | Card, Picture, or Sign Exhibiting, especially
subclasses 446+ for changeable exhibitors. See also (1) Note
above. See subclasses 341 and 342+ for a copy
holder wherein the copy is movable relative to a viewing locus. |
|
| | |
| 808 | With lens casing: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter including structure substantially surrounding
the lens as for protection purposes.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 503, | for tubes and barrels for compound lens systems. |
| 581, | for lenses with coatings for some optical effect. |
| 809, | for lenses combined with cases which encase devices
other than the lens. |
| 811, | for lenses with supports. |
|
| | |
| 809 | Combined with diverse art tool, instrument or
machine: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter wherein the lens is claimed in combination
with a tool, instrument or machine, each of which
is nonoptical in nature, and which combination is not classifiable
with the tool, instrument, or machine.
| | (1)
Note. For classification in this subclass, the
tool, instrument, or machine must be at least
nominally claimed. However, if the lens constitutes
a perfecting feature of the tool, instrument or machine, the claiming
of significant structure of the tool, instrument or machine
is sufficient to classify the combination with the art to which
the tool, instruments, or machines relates.
Examples of tools, instruments, or machines combined
with lenses and classified here are rulers, compasses, dividers, tweezers, thermometers, pencils, and
sewing machines. Where the lens is claimed in combination
with a support which is in turn disclosed as being attachable to
an unclaimed tool, instrument, or machine, classification
is with the lens and support in subclasses 811+ below. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 440+, | for lenses combined with structure including a scale
or indicator. |
| 448, | 581, 726+, 737, and
738, for lenses combined with other optical structure such
as prisms, mirrors, and light valves. |
| 798+, | for lenses combined with viewed object illuminating
structure. |
| 811, | for lenses with supports. See also (1) Note
above. |
|
| | |
| 810 | Operation viewed through lens: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 809. Subject matter wherein the lens is so positioned with respect
to the tool, instrument, or machine that the operation
or functioning of the tool, instrument, or machine
may be viewed through the lens. |
| | |
| 811 | With support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 642. Subject matter including structure to maintain the lens
in space or in relation to some other object such as a barrel or
tube in either a fixed position or in a fixed path of movement or
in a limited area of movement.
| | (1)
Note. Subject matter classifiable here must include
the lens at least broadly in combination with the support, or
a lens support alone which is peculiarly adapted to lens mounting
without general utility, as in the lens mounting subclasses
of 819+. Class 248, Supports, provides
for supports generally even though disclosed with a lens, but
not peculiar thereto. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 391+, | for object stages or carriers. |
| 503+, | for lens spacing structure with supports therefor. |
| 803, | for lenses with support for the viewed object. |
| 808, | for lenses with casing or protection means. |
| 809+, | for lenses claimed with diverse art tools, instruments
or machines which may also be supports. |
| 812, | for lenses with handles. |
| 892, | for optical filters with supports. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 248, | Supports,
subclasses 127+ for stands and subclasses 200+ for brackets. |
|
| | |
| 812 | With additional handle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter including a support for the lens together
with an additional handle for moving the lens to and from its support
position.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 409+, | for opera glass handles. |
| 805, | for lenses with a viewed object support on the lens
supporting, handle. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 16, | Miscellaneous Hardware (e.g., Bushing, Carpet
Fastener, Caster, Door Closer, Panel
Hanger, Attachable or Adjunct Handle, Hinge, Window
Sash Balance, etc.),
subclasses 110.1 through 430for handles generally. |
|
| | |
| 813 | Lens movable in its plane: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter wherein the support includes relatively movable
portions such as a track or slide to permit movement of the lens
in its plane (which is perpendicular to its lens axis), while
restricting other movements of the lens.
| | (1)
Note. Other structure separate from the above defined
relatively movable portions may be included even in the support
to provide for nonplanar movement and yet not preclude classification
here. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 441+, | for lens combined with scales, the lens
being movable over the scale. |
| 806, | for lenses combined with a relatively movable informatory
sheet. |
|
| | |
| 815 | Body or apparel attached or carried: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter wherein the support is shaped or otherwise
adapted to engage portions of the body or apparel thereof to position
the lens with respect to the body of the user.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 362+, | for body or apparel carried compound lens spaced
means. |
| 812, | for lenses with handles. |
|
| | |
| 816 | Monocular loupe type: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 815. Subject matter wherein the support is shaped to position
the lens before the eye so that the lens moves with the head of
the user.
| | (1)
Note. The support may be adapted to engage the head
directly or to be attached to spectacle frames. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 481, | for binocular type loupes. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclass 158 for loupes combined with eyeglasses and subclasses
159.01+ for ophthalmic lenses and blanks. |
|
| | |
| 817 | Foldable or collapsible: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter wherein one part of the supporting structure
may be folded with respect to another part or wherein the supporting
structure may be folded with respect to the lens to reduce the space
occupied by the lens and its support.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 406, | for collapsible periscopes. |
| 408, | for collapsible or foldable binoculars. |
| 474, | for collapsible stereoscopic viewers. |
|
| | |
| 818 | With clamp or grip: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter wherein the support includes opposing surfaces
for detachably engaging therebetween the supporting object for maintaining
the support positioned with respect to the object.
| | (1)
Note. The engaging surfaces may be spring or screw
actuated. These surfaces do not engage the lens as in
subclasses 819+ below, but rather the structure
to which the support may be attached. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 804+, | for lenses including a support for the object being
viewed. |
| 809+, | for lens and their supports attached to diverse
art tools, instruments, or machines by a clamp
or grip. |
| 819+, | for lens mountings wherein the support engages the
lens. |
|
| | |
| 819 | Lens mounts: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 811. Subject matter including structure engaging the rim portion
around substantially the entire circumference or rim of the lens
or its components to secure the lens to supporting structure or
to secure the components in proper spaced relation without obstructing
the optical axis.
| | (1)
Note. More commonly the structure here classified
is a ring gripping the periphery of the lens with a thread for screwing
into a barrel or wall of some optical instrument, such
as a telescope, microscope, or camera.
A plurality of these rings gripping respective lens components together
with the ring supporting structure to maintain the components in
proper spaced relationship is classified here. The mount
must engage the lens over substantially the entire rim.
A mere screw or clamp engaging a portion of the lens rim is not
classified here, but in subclass 811 above. The
mere inclusion of the telescope, microscope, or camera
barrel broadly in the claim does not preclude classification here. |
| | (2)
Note. Class 396, Photography, appropriate
subclasses for a lens mounting in combination with significant camera structure.
Examples of such significant terms are film track, film
plane, film holder, camera casing, camera
housing, camera body with recess, camera cone, camera
chamber, shutter, etc. The mere recitation
of a camera wall or mounting plate or focal plane is not sufficient
to remove lens mounting structure from this subclass (819). |
| | (3)
Note. Class 362, Illumination, in
subclasses 455+ provide for illuminating lens mounts.
For classification there, significant illuminating structure
would be claimed or the indicated use of the mounted lens would
be for illuminating purposes as opposed to the general optical use
in this subclass (819). Class 353, Optics:
Image Projectors, in subclasses 24, 96, and
100+ provide for lens mounts in projectors, and
for classification where significant projector structure is recited
such as slide holder, illuminating source, or
projector housing. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 507+, | for lens mounts with moisture or dust sealing. |
| 892, | for filter mountings. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 285, | Pipe Joints or Couplings,
subclasses 405+ for flanged pipe joints. |
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures, appropriate subclasses for lens holders and supports
together with motion picture structure as required by Class 352. |
| 353, | Optics: Image Projectors,
subclasses 24 , 96, and 100+ for a
lens mount in an image projector. See (3) Note above. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 455+ for illuminating lens holders and supports. See
also (3) Note above. |
| 396, | Photography, appropriate subclasses for camera structure with
lens mounting structure and see (2) Note above. |
|
| | |
| 820 | With temperature compensation or control: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter wherein the mounting includes or is combined
with structure to offset or minimize the effect of temperature change.
| | (1)
Note. The structure classified here may be lens
supporting material whose dimensions remain unchanged over a range
of temperature change or heating structure for offsetting temperature changes
otherwise occurring or for reducing moisture accumulation or heat insulating
structure. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 362+, | for compound lens systems with desiccating means. |
| 507+, | for mirrors with moisture prevention. |
| 554+, | for mirrors with distortion prevention. |
| 823, | for lens mountings with axial adjustment. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 219, | Electric Heating,
subclass 521 for electrical heaters including a support for
the material to be heated. |
| 396, | Photography,
subclasses 7+ for aerial cameras. |
|
| | |
| 821 | Plural lenses in common carrier selectively operable (e.g., turret
type, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter including mounting structure for a plurality
of lenses and which permits any one of the lenses to be moved in
and out of the optical path, together with structure for
moving the lenses in and out of the optical path.
| | (1)
Note. Usually the lenses are mounted on a common
carrier and operated as a unit. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 381, | and 421, for compound lens systems with
selective power obtained by a common carrier having a plurality
of lenses selectively operable. |
| 672+, | for lenses of selective focal length by exchangeable
lens components or by the addition of such component.
See also (1) Note under this subclass. |
|
| | |
| 822 | Adjustable: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter wherein a parameter of the lens (e.g., focal
length, etc.) is selectively varied. |
| | |
| 823 | With axial adjustment (e.g., adjustable focus, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter including structure for moving or permitting
motion of the lens along its optical axis or for moving or permitting
motion along the optical axis of at least two of the lens components
relative to one another.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 694+, | for adjusting mechanisms for variable focal length
lenses. |
| 813, | for supports for movement of the lens in its plane. |
| 820, | for lens mountings permitting axial movement of
the lens in response to temperature change. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 396, | Photography,
subclasses 89+ for focusing lens structure in cameras. See (2) Note
under subclass 819 above for lines between this class and Class
396 relating to camera lens mount. |
|
| | |
| 824 | Electromagnetic or piezoelectric drive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 823. Subject matter wherein the structure for moving or permitting
motion of the lens along its optical axis or for moving or permitting
motion along the optical axis of at least two of the lens components
relative to one another includes a source of mechanical motive power
which is driven by electrical means. |
| | |
| 825 | Focusing ring: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 823. Subject matter wherein there is a circular band for adjusting
the position of a point at which light rays converge. |
| | |
| 826 | Sliding barrels: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 823. Subject matter wherein there are at least two cylindrical
tubes, one of which fits and slides in an axial direction
partially inside other.
| | (1)
Note. Excluded from this subclass are barrels which
are threaded. | |
| | |
| 827 | Detachably attached (e.g., plate, barrel, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter wherein the mounting or plate or barrel to
which the mounting is to be secured includes structure such as a
snap connection, bayonet joint, screw threads, or
like interengaging parts which permit ready securing and removal
of the mounting from the plate or barrel.
| | (1)
Note. The mounting here is often one of several
interchangeable camera lens mounts while the plate is the camera wall. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 821, | for plural lenses selectively operable in a common
carrier. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 285, | Pipe Joints or Couplings,
subclass 189 for pipe to side or plate joints. |
|
| | |
| 828 | Bayonet coupling: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 827. Subject matter wherein the mounting is a quick coupling
device comprising pins on the sides of a male connector portion
to engage corresponding slots in a socket where connection is accomplished
by rotating two parts under pressure. |
| | |
| 830 | With ring: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 819. Subject matter having a circular band for holding, connecting, packing, sealing, etc. |
| | |
| 831 | PRISM (INCLUDING MOUNT): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including a transparent optical element having
at least two plane surfaces inclined relative to each other, from which
light is reflected or through which light is refracted.
| | (1)
Note. A prism may be employed for refracting or
reflecting light. Prism reflections are considered to
be internal reflections; that is, the light is
inside the prism body both before and immediately after the reflection. |
| | (2)
Note. A prism mount structure engaging the prism
to secure it to other structure such as a barrel without obstructing
the optical axis is included in this subclass. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 290+, | for prisms with means to change the refractive index. |
| 431, | for compound lens systems with prisms for telescopes. |
| 592+, | for refracting elements employed in natural light
directing systems. |
| 606, | for prismoidal anti-glare mirrors. |
| 615, | for prisms which disperse light. |
| 618+, | for plural path optical systems which divide or
combine light paths. |
| 737, | for lenses with prisms. |
| 819+, | for lens mountings. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing,
subclasses 51+ for optical test devices having prisms used in
the infrared or ultraviolet range alone or in combination with visible
light. |
|
| | |
| 835 | For binocular or porro-prism: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 834. Subject matter wherein a prism is made up of two right angle
prisms placed at right angles to each other that can be used in
a binocular.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 375, | for a binocular microscope using a compound lens
systems. |
| 407+, | for binocular telescope. |
| 480+, | for binocular devices. |
|
| | |
| 836 | Roof or roof-angle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 834. Subject matter comprising surfaces that revert and invert
the image and, at the same time, will deviate
the line of sight through a 90° angle. |
| | |
| 838 | MIRROR: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter including a structure which reflects a substantial
portion of the light incident thereon in a regular pattern.
| | (1)
Note. A nominal mirror claimed in combination with
other structure is classified with the other structure. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 212.1 | through 215.1, for light deflection by a periodically moving reflective
element. |
| 223+, | for reflectors specifically designed for changing
the direction of reflected beams. |
| 515+, | for light beam reflectors used for
signalling (e.g., retroreflectors). |
| 603+, | for antiglare means for mirrors. |
| 629+, | for reflectors used in light dividing or combining
systems. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 74, | Machine Element or Mechanism,
subclass 502.1 for a flexible mirror moving mechanism. |
| 126, | Stoves and Furnaces,
subclasses 684+ for working fluid solar collectors with concentrating
reflectors. |
| 248, | Supports,
subclasses 466+ for mirror type supports or supports wherein a mirror
is only nominally recited. |
| 362, | Illumination,
subclasses 296.01 through 296.1and 317-361 for light sources combined
with reflectors. |
| 472, | Amusement Devices, particularly
subclass 63 for an illusion caused by a mirror and see the
Search Notes thereunder. |
|
| | |
| 839 | With a transmitting property: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter including a mirror area which partially transmits
and partially reflects light rays or including a plurality of light
transmitting and light reflecting areas interspersed.
| | (1)
Note. Included here are one-way mirrors. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 630+, | for a transparent reflector used for light dividing
or combining purposes. |
| 633, | for a transparent reflector with successive reflectors. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 472, | Amusement Devices,
subclass 58 for a stage or illusion device using a transparent
reflector. |
|
| | |
| 840 | Back to back: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter comprising two immediately adjacent and oppositely
directed mirrors which are rigidly connected.
| | (1)
Note. This type of mirror is often referred to as
a double mirror. | |
| | |
| 841 | Retractable vehicle mirror: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter including a mirror mounted on a vehicle and
movable from an in-use position to a stored position or
to a position closely adjacent the vehicle.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 872+, | for a mirror movable relative to a support, in
general. |
|
| | |
| 844 | On adjustable diverse vehicle portion or accessory: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter comprising a mirror mounted on a vehicle
attachment which is movable relative to the vehicle.
| | (1)
Note. An example of such a vehicular attachment
is a sun visor. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 875, | for a mirror controlled by a rigid handle extending
to or near the mirror pivot. |
|
| | |
| 845 | Fluid cooled mirror: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter including a fluid to absorb heat that would
otherwise cause thermal distortion of the reflective surface.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 165, | Heat Exchange, appropriate subclasses for generic thermal energy removal
by circulating fluid. |
|
| | |
| 848 | With structure to minimize internal mirror stress: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 846. Subject matter including supporting a mirror so as to minimize
internal mirror stress which might otherwise distort the shape of
the reflective surface.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes light weight mirror
structures designed to minimize sagging stress. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 845, | for thermal mirror stress reduction by circulating
fluid. |
| 883, | for laminated or layered mirror support structure
in general. |
|
| | |
| 850 | Plural mirrors or reflecting surfaces: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter comprising multiple mirrors or mirror surfaces.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 839, | for plural mirrors in series wherein at least one
of the mirrors has a transmitting property. |
|
| | |
| 851 | Composite or echelon mirrors or light concentrating array: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 850. Subject matter comprising a plurality of mirrors or mirror
surfaces cooperating to form a unified image or to concentrate light
in a focal area or along a focal line or comprising several substantially
identical mirrors for concentrating light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 868+, | for mirrors with one continuous reflecting surface
of varied radius. |
|
| | |
| 852 | With a line focus: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 851. Subject matter including a plurality of mirrors or mirror
surfaces which concentrate light in a linear pattern.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 867, | for a single mirror providing a line focus. |
| 869, | for a concave mirror of varied radius. |
|
| | |
| 856 | With successive reflections: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 855. Subject matter wherein a substantial portion of the light
is reflected at least two times in series.
| | (1)
Note. Included here is a folded optical path. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 857+, | for mirrors with reflections in series not involving
a transmitting property nor identical adjacent mirrors identically
supported. |
|
| | |
| 857 | With successive reflections: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 850. Subject matter wherein a substantial portion of the light
is reflected at least two times in series.
| | (1)
Note. Included here is a folded optical path. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 633, | for serial reflections in a head-up type system
where visual information is superimposed on an observer’s
field of view. |
| 856, | for identical adjacent mirrors identically supported
with reflections in series. |
|
| | |
| 858 | Including curved mirror surfaces in series: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 857. Subject matter comprising a curved mirror surface which
receives the light from itself or another curved mirror surface.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 365+, | for compound lens systems with curved mirrors in
series. |
|
| | |
| 859 | With concave and convex
mirrors in series: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 858. Subject matter including a concave mirror and a
convex mirror cooperating to sequentially reflect the light.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 366, | for compound lens systems with concave and convex
mirrors in series. |
| 731, | for a lens with concave and convex reflectors in
series. |
|
| | |
| 860 | To view observer: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 857. Subject matter wherein the plural reflections are arranged
to provide a view of a portion of the observer. |
| | |
| 866 | Wide angle segmented mirrors: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 850. Subject matter including plural angled mirrors or mirror
surfaces with the intersection of the surfaces or their extensions
forming discontinuities to provide a wide field of view. |
| | |
| 868 | With mirror surface of varied radius: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter including a nonspherical continuously curved
reflecting surface.
| | (1)
Note. The mirror surface may be parabolically or
elliptically shaped. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 846+, | for mirror surfaces of varied radii with means for
controlling the shape of such surfaces. |
| 857+, | for mirror surfaces of varied radii with successive
reflections. |
| 858+, | for curved mirrors in series, one of which
may include a mirror surface of varied radius. |
|
| | |
| 869 | Concave: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 868. Subject matter wherein a nonspherical continuously curved
reflecting surface includes a smooth surface indented away from
the direction of an incident light beam.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 852, | for composite or echelon mirrors providing a line
focus. |
| 867, | for a concave cylindrical mirror providing a line
focus. |
|
| | |
| 870 | Fracture resistant (e.g., shatterproof, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter including structure to retain mirror pieces
in position upon breakage.
| | (1)
Note. Included herein are mirrors with an adhesive
or film preventing movement of the broken elements. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 846+, | for shape retention or control of a mirror surface. |
|
| | |
| 871 | With support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter including structure for supporting a mirror.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 248, | Supports,
subclasses 466+ for mirror type support structures or supports wherein
a mirror is only nominally recited. |
|
| | |
| 872 | Mirror movable relative to support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 871. Subject matter including structure for moving a mirror relative
to a support structure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 843, | for mirrors automatically adjustable with vehicle
position. |
| 844, | for mirrors on a relatively movable vehicle portion
or accessory. |
| 854, | for identical side mirrors adjustable with respect
to a central mirror. |
| 862, | for plural mirrors with successive reflections including
an adjustable mirror. |
| 865, | for relative adjustable plural mirrors. |
|
| | |
| 874 | With rotation of mirror about perpendicular axes: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 873. Subject matter including structure for rotating a mirror
about axes that are at right angles to each other.
| | (1)
Note. The axes need not be axes of symmetry. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 876, | for mirrors with structure for rotation about perpendicular
axes not involving rotary to linear motion conversion. |
|
| | |
| 875 | With a rigid handle extending to or near a mirror pivot: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 872. Subject matter including a rigid handle extending to a mirror
pivot or to an intermediate pivot with a short linkage extending
in turn to a mirror to provide short range operation.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes a rigid handle which
extends through a vehicle wall to provide direct pivotal movement
to mirrors. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 844, | for mirror controls extending through a vehicle
door. |
|
| | |
| 876 | With rotation of mirror about perpendicular axes: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 872. Subject matter including structure for rotating a mirror
about axes that are at right angles to each other.
| | (1)
Note. The axes need not be axes of symmetry. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 874, | for mirrors with rotary to linear motion converting
mirror adjustment for rotation about perpendicular axes. |
|
| | |
| 877 | With switch or motor controlling mirror movement: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 872. Subject matter including a switch or motor which is activated
to provide power to move a mirror.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 873+, | and 876, for mirror supports with rotary
to linear mirror adjusting structure or structure permitting rotation about
perpendicular axes, respectively. |
|
| | |
| 878 | Fluid pressure actuated: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 877. Subject matter including an element applying an adjusting
force to the mirror which is actuated by a force applying gas or
liquid.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 137, | Fluid Handling, appropriate subclasses for generic devices actuated by
fluid pressure. |
|
| | |
| 880 | Having support or apparel engaging head or neck: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 879. Subject matter including structure to support a mirror from
the head or neck portion of the body of the operator or clothing
engaged therewith.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 128, | Surgery,
subclasses 21+ for surgical diagnostic testing reflectors. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclass 50 for eyeglasses combined with a rear-view reflector. |
|
| | |
| 882 | With handle: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 871. Subject matter including a rigid, solid extension
connected to the mirror, support, or enclosure.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 875, | for a mirror with rigid handle extending to a mirror
pivot. |
|
| | |
| 883 | Laminated or layered mirror support: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 871. Subject matter including a plurality of laminations or layers
backing the mirror to support the mirror.
| | (1)
Note. Laminated or layered mirror supports specifically
designed to minimize internal mirror stress are classified in this
class, subclass 848. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses for structurally defined
laminates in general. |
|
| | |
| 884 | With selective absorption or transparent over-coating: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 838. Subject matter including a mirror which absorbs particular
visible wavelengths or includes an overcoating without absorbing properties.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 577+, | for interference coatings or lamina. |
| 839, | for a mirror having a transmitting property. |
| 885+, | for absorption filters. |
|
| | |
| 885 | ABSORPTION FILTER: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter which absorbs a portion of the incident ray
energy and transmits the remainder.
| | (1)
Note. For classification here, some structure
other than a material having filtering properties is required.
For example, a plurality of superimposed filtering layers
which cooperate to give some desired optical effect would be sufficient for
classification here. See Class 252, Compositions, subclasses
299.01+ for liquid crystal containing filter compositions
and subclasses 582+ for other filter compositions and Class
428, Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, for filter
stock material. |
| | (2)
Note. Included here are not only those devices which
may be selective with regard to the visible spectrum (i.e., colored), but
also those devices which may be nonselective in the absorption of
light energy (i.e., neutral
density type). |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 350+, | for filter which operates significantly in the ultraviolet
or infrared spectrum; particularly, subclass 358
for fluid filter and subclasses 359+ for multilayer filter. |
| 491.01, | for polarizers combined with color filter means. |
| 577+, | for dichroic or interference filter, particularly, subclass
588 for filter having four or more layers and subclass 590 for combining
with another filter. |
| 601, | for glare reducing means which may include filter
means. |
| 722+, | for lens having selective wavelength transmitting
or blocking properties and subclass 723 for a lens combined with
a separate selective element. |
| 884, | for mirrors having selective light reflecting properties
or combined with elements having such properties. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 2, | Apparel,
subclasses 12+ for eye shades which may include a filter. |
| 250, | Radiant Energy,
subclasses 503.1+ for an invisible radiation modifying member generally. |
| 252, | Compositions,
subclasses 299.01+ for liquid-crystal compositions and subclasses
582+ for other optical filter compositions and for optical
articles defined only in terms of the composition of which they
are composed. |
| 313, | Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices,
subclass 112 for electric lamps and electronic tubes which have
a light filter structurally combined therewith. |
| 333, | Wave Transmission Lines and Networks,
subclass 167 for electrical filters generally. |
| 343, | Communications: Radio Wave Antennas,
subclasses 909+ for radio wave filters, per se. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 44+ for spectacles or spectacle type goggles with filtering
lenses, and subclasses 159.6 through 159.65
for ophthalmic lenses or blanks with light filtering means. |
| 356, | Optics: Measuring and Testing, particularly
subclasses 402+ for shade or color filter devices which use one
or more color filters additively or sequentially or at the same
time particularly subclasses 234+ and 416+ for
photometers of the light absorbing type for neutral filters of the
sequentially additive or of the continuously variable type. |
| 362, | Illumination, for illuminating devices in combination with a filter,
subclasses 1+ for daylight lamps; subclasses 3+ for
photographic safe light lanterns; subclasses 166+ for
signal lanterns with color screens and for hand lanterns with color
screens; and subclass 293 for light projectors having a
colored light screen. |
| 378, | X-Ray or Gamma Ray Systems or Devices,
subclasses 156+ for X-ray filters. |
| 380, | Cryptography,
subclass 54 for this subject matter used in a device for revealing
concealed information. |
| 396, | Photography,
subclasses 544+ for camera attachments which may include a filter. |
| 424, | Drug, Bio-Affecting and Body
Treating Compositions,
subclasses 59+ for a sun or radiation screening or sun tanning
composition intented for topical application to a living body. |
| 427, | Coating Processes,
subclasses 162+ for coating processes, per se, wherein the
product is an optical element. |
| 428, | Stock Material or Miscellaneous Articles, appropriate subclasses for a single or plural layer web
or sheet which may inherently possess light filtering properties
due to the material thereof; coated filters comprising
plural layers and defined only by the compositions of the layers
are found in Class 428,
subclasses 411.1+ and especially subclasses 426+ wherein
one layer is glass. |
| 430, | Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, or
Product Thereof,
subclasses 507 and 510+ for filter. |
|
| | |
| 886 | Fluid: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter wherein the filtering material is in gas, liquid, or
vapor form.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 665+, | for fluid type lenses. |
| 832, | for fluid filled prisms. |
|
| | |
| 887 | Sequentially additive: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter comprising two or more surfaces of different
selectivity which are intended to sequentially affect a sensing
element (which may be the human eye) at such a
rate that their effects are combined in an optically additive way.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 348, | Television,
subclasses 571 through 721and 725-738 for similar subject matter
combined with generators or displays for television, and
subclass 743 for video display color sequential with moving color
filters. |
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclasses 45 and 66+ for similar subject matter used
in the motion picture art. |
|
| | |
| 888 | Neutral or graded density: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter wherein the filter or a portion thereof absorbs
ray energy independently of wavelength and the corresponding transmittance
may be uniform or variable.
| | (1)
Note. Where the density differences of various areas
are incidentally due to the fact that the areas are of different
colors, the subject matter is not classified here but in
some other appropriate filter subclass. | |
| | |
| 889 | Movable in or out of optical path: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter wherein one or more filters may be selectively
moved into and out of an optical path.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 887, | for filter movable in and out of an optical path
in a predetermined pattern resulting in the sequential addition
of colors. |
| 888, | for such subject matter where the filter is of the
neutral density type or has graded optical densities. |
|
| | |
| 890 | Superimposed or series: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter wherein two or more filters are disposed
so that ray energy may pass through all the filters in series. |
| | |
| 891 | Filters in optical parallel (e.g., colors
side-by-side, etc.): |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter having a plurality of differently colored
filters arranged in such a fashion that ray energy passing through
one filter does not pass through any other filter and the resultant filtered
rays are uniformly equidistant.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 618+, | for similar subject matter used with light dividing
and combining systems. |
| 887, | where colored ray energies are sequentially additive. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 352, | Optics: Motion Pictures,
subclasses 45 and 66+ for similar subject matter used
in the motion picture art. |
| 396, | Photography,
subclasses 305+ for similar camera color image forming using monochrome
film. |
|
| | |
| 892 | With support or frame: |
| | This subclass is indented under subclass 885. Subject matter comprising means for mounting a filter.
| | (1)
Note. See search class notes below for supports
of general application, and for frame structure in terms
of a panel, closure, etc. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 611+, | for barrel end shades which may have filters therein. |
| 811+, | for support means for lenses. |
| 819+, | for lens mounting means. |
| 831, | for mounting means for prisms. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 52, | Static Structures (e.g., Buildings), particularly
subclasses 474+ , 633+, and 782+ for
rigid panel structure and frames therefore. |
| 160, | Flexible or Portable Closure, Partition, or
Panel,
subclasses 371+ for frames for flexible panels or closures. |
| 248, | Supports, for supports of general application. |
|
| | |
| 893 | SCREEN (E.G., HALFTONE
SCREEN, ETC.): |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter having at least a plate with a multiplicity
of apertures, opaque dots, patterns, or
crossed lines which are intended to break up imaging light.
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 355, | Photocopying,
subclass 80 for light diffusing in localized areas. |
| 396, | Photography,
subclass 545 for light diffusing and masking provided for by that
class. |
| 430, | Radiation Imagery Chemistry: Process, Composition, of
Product Thereof,
subclasses 6+ for chemically defined screens and the process for
making the same and subclasses 396+ for process of using
the same. |
|
| | |
| 894 | OPTICAL APERTURE OR TUBE, OR TRANSPARENT CLOSURE: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter wherein a structure transmits light energy
where all transmitted rays travel in essentially straight lines (i.e., without intentional
deviation as, for example, by reflection, refraction
or diffraction) and without significant attenuation (i.e., without
being filtered).
| | (1)
Note. This subclass includes certain specialized
viewing devices which involve no intentional deviation of light
rays such as, for example, certain underwater viewing
devices. It also includes apertures, transparent
closures, etc., with no significant optical
element classifiable in the preceding subclasses, but some
optical feature going beyond, for example, windshields
in Class 296, subclasses 84.1+. This
might be, for example, means to compensate for
the offsetting of ray energy in passing through a transparent closure. |
| | (2)
Note. This definition does not exclude subject matter
where certain rays are transmitted and certain other rays are completely
blocked. |
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
| 227+, | for movable apertured plates which control light. |
| 480+, | for binocular viewing devices. |
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 385, | Optical Waveguides, appropriate subclasses for optical wave-guides
which utilize total internal reflection. |
|
| | |
| 896 | MISCELLANEOUS: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Subject matter not provided for in any preceding subclass. |
| | |
CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS
| 900 | METHODS: |
| | Cross-reference art collection of optical methods.
SEE OR SEARCH THIS CLASS, SUBCLASS:
SEE OR SEARCH CLASS:
| 65, | Glass Manufacturing,
subclasses 37+ for lens making involving the working or treating
of glass. |
| 156, | Adhesive Bonding and Miscellaneous Chemical Manufacture,
subclasses 99+ for optically transparent glass lens sandwich making, which may
include a grinding step. |
| 264, | Plastic and Nonmetallic Article Shaping or Treating:
Processes,
subclasses 1.1+ for optical article shaping or treating such as
molding. |
| 351, | Optics: Eye Examining, Vision
Testing and Correcting,
subclasses 159.73 through 159.81for methods of making ophthalmic lenses or blanks
not otherwise classifiable and subclass 178 for methods of securing
these lenses in their mountings. |
| 451, | Abrading,
subclasses 42+ for a lens grinding method. See the reference
to Class 156 below. |
|
| | |
| 901 | ACOUSTIC HOLOGRAPHY: |
| | Cross-reference art collection of patents having to
do with holographic techniques using sound vibrations. |
| | |
| 902 | HOLOGRAPHIC INTERFEROMETER: |
| | Cross-reference art collection of patents having to
do with using holography in instruments that use light interference
phenomena for precise determinations of wavelength, spectral
line structure, very small displacements, and
indices of refraction. |
| | |
| 903 | WITH MAGNET: |
| | Cross-reference art collection of patents wherein
the optical element has a magnet for temporarily attaching it to
any object containing ferrous material.
| | (1)
Note. This would include an optical element mounted
on a magnet for placement on a refrigerator door wherein the sole
purpose is for ornamental use. | |
| | |
| 904 | MICRO MIRROR: |
| | This subclass is indented under the class definition. Cross-reference art collection containing patents
having optical systems or elements relating to micro mirrors.
| | (1)
Note. This subclass contains XR documents only. | |
| | |
FOREIGN ART COLLECTIONS
The definitions below correspond to abolished subclasses
from which these collections were formed. See the Foreign
Art Collection schedule of this class for specific correspondences. [Note:
The titles and definitions for indented
art collections include all the details of the one(s) that
are hierarchically superior.] |
| FOR 100 | DEFLECTION USING A MOVING ELEMENT OR MEDIUM (OFFSETTING
OR CHANGING AT LEAST A PORTION OF THE BEAM): |
| | Foreign art collection comprising structure for
offsetting or changing the direction of at least a portion of the
incident light by moving a light reflecting or transmitting element or
medium into or out of the light beam or by changing the position
of a reflecting or transmitting element or medium in the light beam.
| | (1)
Note. A prism may be employed for refracting or reflecting
light. Prism reflections are considered to be internal reflections; that
is, the light is inside the prism body before and immediately
after reflection. Light beam deflection by a movable prism
is included in this subclass. |
| | (2)
Note. Lenses or curved surface mirrors movable for
focusing are classified elsewhere in this class. | |
| | |
| FOR 101 | Using a periodically moving element (periodic
change of optically reflecting, refracting or diffracting
element): |
| | Foreign art collection including an optically reflecting, refracting, or
diffracting element as the scanning element whose orientation is changed
in a periodic manner.
| | (1)
Note. The motion of reflectors resulting from vehicle
vibration, the motion of vehicle wheels, the action
of wind, etc., is considered to be of
an irregular nature and not periodic within the meaning of this
definition. | |
| | |
| FOR 102 | Particular mount or driver for element: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein details of the structure
for supporting the moving element or for moving it are claimed. |
| | |
| FOR 103 | Particular oscillating driver: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein a specific device
imparting back and forth motion to the element is recited. |
| | |
| FOR 104 | Bearing or shaft for rotary driver: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein a specific rod transmitting
rotational motion from a driver or the supporting device within
which the rod turns is recited. |
| | |
| FOR 105 | Plural moving scanning elements: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein deflection is achieved
by multiple optical elements which are not stationary. |
| | |
| FOR 106 | X-Y scanner: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the multiple elements
cause a deflection of light in two mutually perpendicular directions. |
| | |
| FOR 107 | Having a common axis of rotation: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the multiple elements
revolve around the same line. |
| | |
| FOR 108 | Utilizing plural light beams: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the periodically
moving element deflects or scans more than a single light beam simultaneously. |
| | |
| FOR 109 | Having particular focusing element to receive scanned
light: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein a specific optical
element gathers light from the actual scanning element. |
| | |
| FOR 110 | High distortion lens (e.g., fQ
lens, etc.): |
| | Foreign art collection including a lens which forms
an image which is not in proportion to a respective image source. |
| | |
| FOR 111 | Anamorphic element: |
| | Foreign art collection including an element (usually
a lens) for producing magnification in a first plane which
differs from that in a plane perpendicular thereto. |
| | |
| FOR 112 | Concave reflector: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein a mirror-like element
indented away from incident light receives the scanned light. |
| | |
| FOR 113 | Including transmissive type moving element: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the medium of the
scanning element permits the passage of light rays. |
| | |
| FOR 114 | Having moving lens: |
| | Foreign art collection including opposed shaped
and spaced refracting surfaces either of a (1) single
transparent mass or (2) plurality of such masses
arranged in series along an optical axis to produce a single output image
from an object, which are both external to the mass or
masses, from the object light rays passing therethrough. |
| | |
| FOR 115 | Having moving prism: |
| | Foreign art collection including one or more transparent
bodies bounded in part by two plane surfaces which are angularly
related (i.e., not parallel), at
least one of these surfaces being internally reflecting or refracting to
impinging incident light.
| | (1)
Note. A prism may be employed for refracting or reflecting
light. Prism reflections are considered to be internal reflections; that
is, the light is inside the prism body both before and
immediately after the reflection. | |
| | |
| FOR 116 | Including reflective type moving element: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein a light wave that
strikes the medium of the moving element is returned to the original
medium with the angles of incidence and reflection equal and lying
in the same plane. |
| | |
| FOR 117 | Having oscillating element: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the reflecting element
has oscillating or vibrating motion. |
| | |
| FOR 118 | Single plane mirror element: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the element is unitary, flat
and reflecting. |
| | |
| FOR 119 | With imaging lens: |
| | Foreign art collection having a lens typically referred
to as an imaging lens. |
| | |
| FOR 120 | Having multifaceted rotating element: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the reflecting element
has plural sides or faces. |
| | |
| FOR 121 | With facets parallel to rotation axis: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the faces or sides
of the reflective element are parallel to the axis of rotation. |
| | |
| FOR 122 | Having six, seven, or eight facets: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the element has more
than five facets and less than nine facets. |
| | |
| FOR 123 | Having five or fewer facets: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the element has less
than six facets. |
| | |
| FOR 124 | Having planar rotating reflector with transverse rotation
axis: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the faces of the
rotating reflector are not curved and the faces are tilted with
respect to the rotation axis. |
| | |
| FOR 125 | Having planar rotating reflector with rotation axis in
its plane: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the faces of the
rotating reflector are not curved and the faces are parallel to
the axis of rotation. |
| | |
| FOR 126 | By frustrated total internal reflection: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein a light transparent
element has a surface adjacent a second element or medium which
is movable into and out of optical contact with the surface.
| | (1)
Note. A light beam incident on the surface undergoes
total internal reflection. By bringing the second element
or medium into proximity with the surface of the transparent element, total
internal reflection becomes frustrated and the light beam is no
longer totally internally reflected, but instead, is
passed into the second element or medium. | |
| | |
| FOR 127 | By moving a reflective element: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the direction of
at least a portion of an incident light beam is offset or changed
by moving a light-reflecting element into or out of the
light beam or by changing the orientation of the reflecting element
in the light beam. |
| | |
| FOR 128 | Reflective element moved by deformable support: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein a support element
is extended or contracted to modify the position of the reflecting
element. |
| | |
| FOR 129 | Pivoting or moving in circular arc: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the motion of the
moving element traces out a portion of a complete revolution. |
| | |
| FOR 130 | Rotating: |
| | Foreign art collection wherein the reflective element
revolves completely around an axis. |
| | |
| FOR 131 | POLARIZATION WITHOUT MODULATION (359/483): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under the
class definition. Foreign art collection wherein the polarization
of an incoming light beam is modified in a time invariant fashion
as a result of passing through some optical device.
| | (1)
Note. Where both a polarizing device and a composition
are claimed, the patent is classified here and cross-referenced
to Class 252, subclass 585. |
| | (2)
Note. Where a method of making the polarizing device
is claimed as well as the polarizing device, the patent
is classified here and cross-referenced to any other class
providing for the method. |
| | (3)
Note. The nominal recitation of a polarizing area
in the form of a design, image, etc., is
sufficient to include this subject matter in this subclass. | |
| | |
| FOR 132 | Time invariant electric, magnetic or electromagnetic
field responsive (e.g., electro-optical, magneto-optical) (359/484): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
131. Foreign art collection wherein an electrical, magnetic, or
electromagnetic field, which is unchanging in time, is applied
to the device producing the polarization.
| | (1)
Note. This would include optical isolators and circulators. | |
| | |
| FOR 133 | Light polarization without any external input (359/485): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
131. Foreign art collection wherein an optical device
causes optical energy to vibrate in accordance with a regular pattern that
differs from the input without the application of any supplemental
energy. |
| | |
| FOR 134 | By grid or dipoles (359/486): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
133. Foreign art collection wherein electrical conductors
in the form of a grid (i.e., each
grid opening forms a half wavelength of the applied light) or
half wavelength dipoles embedded in the medium produce polarization
of the applied light. |
| | |
| FOR 135 | By reflection or refraction (e.g., Brewster angle) (359/487): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
133. Foreign art collection wherein a light beam is polarized
as a result of either (1) striking a surface and
returning into the originating medium or (2) redirection
as it passes through media of differing optical densities. |
| | |
| FOR 136 | With particular medium (359/488): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
135. Foreign art collection wherein details of the reflecting
or refracting medium are recited (e.g., physical
composition, structure, specific indexes of refraction, or
thickness of layers).
| | (1)
Note. Physical shape (other than layered mediums) or
arrangement of elements or mediums is not considered a particular medium
for this subclass. | |
| | |
| FOR 137 | Polarization (direction or magnitude) varies
over surface of the medium (e.g., vectograph) (359/489): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
133. Foreign art collection comprising a surface which
transmits or reflects light and whose ability to polarize light
is not uniform across the surface.
| | (1)
Note. This variation in polarizing ability may be
continuous or discontinuous and may form any type of pattern.
For example, the different areas of a surface may form
an image or design as in a "vectograph". | |
| | |
| FOR 138 | By dichroic medium (359/490): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
133. Foreign art collection including an optical element
which effects the degree of polarization dependent upon the relative absorption
therein of the two components or vectors of light.
| | (1)
Note. A dichroic element will transmit light of
one color and reflect light of the complementary color with little
light being absorbed. These elements are composed of superimposed
strata of dielectric material, which are classified in
subclass 580. |
| | (2)
Note. Included here are elements where the medium
comprises a lamination or a coating on a supporting structure and where
the supporting structure is significant or the means to form the
lamination or coating is significant. | |
| | |
| FOR 139 | Stain or dye: (359/491) |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
138. Foreign art collection wherein a coloring agent is
absorbed by the polarization medium to affect the polarization of
the applied light beam. |
| | |
| FOR 140 | Oriented particles (359/492): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
138. Foreign art collection wherein the polarization of
the applied light is dependent upon the spatial positioning of microscopic particles
embedded in the dichroic medium. |
| | |
| FOR 141 | Glare prevention by discriminating against polarized light (359/493): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
133. Foreign art collection wherein unwanted glare-producing
light, having a particular polarization, is eliminated
by a polarizing structure. |
| | |
| FOR 142 | By birefringent element (359/494): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
133. Foreign art collection including an element having
the property of dividing a ray or beam of energy into two polarized rays
or beams (known as the ordinary and extraordinary rays), the
directions of polarization being at right angles to each other.
| | (1)
Note. A birefringent material which has been treated
with a dichroic dye to absorb the ordinary or extraordinary ray is
no longer considered to be birefringent within the meaning of this
definition. A birefringent element in the form of a Nicol
prism where the unwanted ray is deflected is classified here. | |
| | |
| FOR 143 | For beam deflection or splitting (359/495): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
142. Foreign art collection wherein the entire beam or
a portion of the beam is caused to change direction for positioning purpose
or wherein the beam is split into two or more portions. |
| | |
| FOR 144 | Prisms (359/496): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
142. Foreign art collection wherein the birefringent element
is formed into a structure bound in part by two plane faces that are
not parallel and combinations of the structure. |
| | |
| FOR 145 | Using plural elements (359/497): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
142. Foreign art collection wherein beam polarization
is achieved by multiple birefringent elements. |
| | |
| FOR 146 | Frequency filter or interference effects (359/498): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
145. Foreign art collection wherein plural elements act
to pass a particular frequency or band of frequencies, or
wherein interference effects are used to produce effects such as
color or an interference pattern. |
| | |
| FOR 147 | Using compensation techniques (359/499): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
145. Foreign art collection wherein at least one of the
elements corrects for unwanted effects, such as those due
to temperature. |
| | |
| FOR 148 | With particular material or mounting structure (359/500): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
142. Foreign art collection wherein details of the birefringent
material, such as the type, size, shape, crystal
cut, or treatment thereof or detailed structures for mounting
the material are recited. |
| | |
| FOR 149 | By relatively adjustable superimposed or in series polarizers (359/501): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
133. Foreign art collection wherein the polarizers are
positioned one on top of another or arranged in a row and their
positions are adjustable. |
| | |
| FOR 150 | With color filter (359/502): |
| | This foreign art collection is indented under FOR
133. Foreign art collection where a polarizing structure
is combined with structure to selectively absorb or transmit specific
light wavelengths. |
| | |
![[Search a list of Patent Appplications for class 359]](../as.gif)
CLASS 359,